1903
liililiir
,. 3 1924 031 255 197
olin.anx ^ '
Cornell University
Library
The original of tliis book is in
tine Cornell University Library.
There are no known copyright restrictions in
the United States on the use of the text.
http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924031255197
ELEMENTARY TREATISE
ANALYTICAL MECHANICS.
BY
WILLIAM G^^PECK, Ph.D., LL.D.,
PROFESSOR OP MATHEMATICS, ^MECHANICS, AND ASTRONOMY IK COLUMBIA COLL&GB.
Copyright, 1887, by William G. Peck.
A. S. BARNES & COMPANY,
NEW YORK AND CHICAGO.
PUBLISHERS' NOTICE.
PECK'S ACADEMIC AND COLLEGIATE COURSE.
I. MANUAL OF ALGEBRA,
n. MANUAL OF GEOMETRY AND CONIC SECTIONS.
III. ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY.
IV. DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS.
V. POPULAR PHYSICS [from Ganot].
VI. ELEMENTARY MECHANICS.
VII. ASTRONOMY AND OPTICS.
VIII. DETERMINANTS.
IX. ANALYTICAL MECHANICS.
PREFACE.
rr^HE following treatise has been prepared for
use as a text-book in the School of Mines, but
it is hoped that it may find a place in other Col-
leges and Schools of Science. It is intended to em-
brace all the principles of Analytical Mechanics that
are needefi by the student of Engineering, Archi-
tecture, and Geodesy. Its order of arrangement is
the result of. much practical experience, and its
methods of demonstration have been thoroughly
tested in the class-room.
In its development the methods of the Differen-
tial and Integral Calculus have been freely used, but
not to the exclusion of the more elementary proc-
esses of Analysis. The plan adopted has been
found to be well suited to Experimental Illustration,
and the numerous practical examples scattered
through the book have proved to be of great utility
in impressing principles on the mind of the student.
IV PEEFACE.
For convenience of reference, the first equation on
each page has. been indicated by a number placed
at the top of that page.
The fundamental principles of the Science are,
for the most part, based on the axiomatic laws of
Newton, but the more modern ideas of "Work and
Energy have been carefully considered and incorpo-
rated in the text. Qoupilli^re's elegant method of
treating the resistance of friction has been fully
illustrated in the processes of finding the moduli of
the elements of Mechanism.
It is believed that the order of arrangement will
be found to be logical, the definitions defer and pre-
cise, and the demonstrations simple and comprehen-
sive.
Columbia College, JvJ/y 4, 1887.
CONTENTS,
I. — Defiititions and Inteoductoey Eemaeks.
Definition of a Body ; Rest and Motion ; Force 9
Definition of Mechanics 10
Equilibrium ; Grarity, Weight, Mass, Density 11
Uniform and Varied Motion 12
Momentum ; "Work, Energy 13
Representation and Measure of Forces 14-15
Newtonian Laws of Motion 15-16
II. — Composition and Resolution of Foeces.
Definitions; Composition of Homologous Forces 17-18
Parallelogram of Forces 18-20
Polygon and Parallelopipedon of Forces 20-22
Resolution and Composition of Rectangular Forces . . . 22-25
Resultant of Two Forces ; Relation between them 26-27
Translation ; Rotation ; Principle of Moments 28-31
Resultant and Composition of Parallel Forces 31-36
Translation ; Rotation ; Equilibrium 36-39
Quantity of Work ; Theorem of Work 39-41
III. — Centee of Geavity and Stability.
Preliminary Definitions and Principles 42-44
Method of Applying the Calculus 44-45
Applications to Lines, Surfaces, and Solids 45-53
VI CONTENTS.
FASEB
The Centrobaric Method 53-55
/Experimental Method 55
Method by Composition 65-59
Stability and Equilibrium of Bodies 60-64
Practical Problems 64^69
IV. — Elementakt Machikes.
Definitions ; Applied and Useful Work ; Modulus.. 70-71
Trains of Mechanism ; Mechanical Powers 71-73
The Cord ; the Lever 73-75
Friction 75-78
Equilibrium Bordering on Motion 78-79
Method vt Finding the Modulus 79-80
Modulus of the Lever 80-81
The Compound Lever 83
Elbow-joint Press ; its Modulus 83-85
Weighing Machines 85-89
The Inclined Plane ; its Modulus 91-95
Single Fixed Pulley ; its Modulus 95-98
Friction of Eope on an Axle 98-99
Single Movable Pulley ; Combinations of Pulleys. . . 99-103
Wheels and Axles ; Windlass ; Differential Windlass 103-108
Wheel-work 108-109
The Screw ; Differential Screw ; the Wedge 110-114
V. — Kinetics.
Definition of Motion ; Fundamental Equations.,.. 115-116
Uniformly Varied Motion ; Applications 116-128
Motion of a Body in a Resisting Medium 139-133
Falling Bodies when Gravity is Variable 132-137
Motion of a Body down a Vertical Curve 137-139
Motion of Projectiles 139-145
Components of Deflecting Force 146-148
Vibration ; Angular Velocity and Acceleration 148-151
COKTENTS. vii
PASES
The Simple Pendulum 153-155
De I'Ambert's Principle ; the Compound Pendulum 155-160
The Keversible Pendulum ; Practical Applications. . 161-166
VI. — Cbnteifugal Force. — Mombbtt of Ineetia.
Centrifugal Force ; Application to Masses ; Illustra-
tions : 167-172
Surface of a Eevolving Liquid 173-173
Application to Figure of the Earth 173-176
Elevation of Outer Eail of Curved Track 176-177
Conical Pendulum ; Governor 177-180
Moment of Inertia ; Kelation to Parallel Axes 181-183
Polar Moment ; Experimental Determination 183-185
Application to Lines^ Surfaces, and Volumes 185-194
Radius of Gyration 194-195
VII. — WOEK AND EnEEGY. IMPACT.
Eelation between Work and Energy 196-198
Work of Gravity when a Body Falls Down a Curve. 198-301
Work to Eaise a System of Bodies 301-303
Work in Producing Rotation 204^306
Kinetic Energy of a Eevolving Body 306-307
Fly-wheels with Applications 307-315
Elasticity ; Impact 315-331
VIII. — Mechanics of Liquids.
Classification ; Transmission of Pressures 335-337
Pressure due to Weight ; Centre of Pressure 337-333
Buoyant Effort of Fluids 336-337
Floating Bodies 337-339
Specific Gravity ; Methods of Finding. 339-341
Method by Use of Balance 341-343
Hydrometers ; Alco-ometer 343-347
Vlll COKTBlSrTS.
PAGXB
Velocity of Jet ; Modifications of Formulas 248-356
Time for a Vessel to Empty Itself 256-357
Flow of Water in Pipes and Channels 257-264
IX. — Mechajtics of Gases and Vapoks.
Gases and Vapors ; Atmospheric Pressure 365-267
Laws of Mariotte and Gay Lussac , . 268-373
Absolute Temperature .... 273-274
Manometers; Siphon Gauge; Diving Bell 274-278
The Barometer and its Uses 278-283
Work due to Expansion of Vapor ; Steam 284-288
Efflux of a Gas or Vapor 288-390
X. — Hydraulic autd Pnetjhatic MACHiiirBS.
Definitions ; Water Pumps. 391-393
Lifting Pump ; Modifications 293-296
Forcing Pump ; Modifications 396-300
Fire Engine ; Eotary Pump 300-302
Hydraulic Press 302-304
Method of Storing Up Pressure 305-306
Siphons ; Intermitting Springs 306-309
The Hydraulic Eam 309-310
Archimedes' Screw 310-311
Blowers ; Blacksmith's Bellows : 313-314
Air-pump ; Fountains 314r-319
Note. — Names of Greek letters used in this book :
a. Alpha.
i8. Beta. '
y. Gramma.
6. Delta.
e. Theta.
TT. Pi.
f}. Rho.
2. Sigma.
T. Tau.
Phi.
Omega.
MECHANICS.
I.— DEFINITIONS AND INTRODUCTOEY
PRINCIPLES.
Definition of a Body.
1. A body is a collection of material particles.
A body whose dimensions are exceedingly small is called
a material point. In what follows the term point will
generally be used in this sense.
Rest and Motion.
3. A point is at rest when it remains in the same relative
position with respect to certain surrounding bodies that we
regard as fixed ; it is in motion when it continually changes
this relative position.
The terms rest and motion as used in Mechanics are purely
relative ; it is probable that no point in the physical universe
is absolutely at rest.
Force.
3. A force is that which tends to change the state of a
body with respect to rest or motion.
If a body is at rest, whatever tends to set it in motion is a
force ; if in motion, whatever tends to make it move faster or
10 MECHAKICS.
slower, or whatever tends to change the direction of its
motion, is a force.
A force may act on a body for an instant and then cease, in
which case it is called an impulse, or an imptilsive force ;
or, it may act continuously, in which case it is called an in-
cessant force.
For the purposes of mathematical investigation, an inces-
sant force may be regarded as made up of a succession of
impulses acting at eqnal but exceedingly small intervals of
' time. This interval, in the language of the calculus, may be
denoted by dt, t being an independent variable and dt its
constant differential. If the successive or elementary im-
pulses are all equal the force is said to be constant, other-
wise it is variable.
If forces act on a fixed body they produce stress, or press-
ure; if they act on a body that is free to move they produce
motion : in the former case they are called forces of press-
ure, in the latter case they are called moving forces.
The same force under different circumstances may produce
either pressure or motion : thus, if gravity act on a body that
is supported it produces pressure, but if it acts on a body that
is not supported it produces motion.
Definition of Mechanics.
4. Mechanics is the science that treats of the action of
forces on bodies.
It is divided into two branches : Statics, which treats of
the laws of pressure ; and Kinetics (or Dynamics), which
treats of the laws of motion.
In kinetics it is not motion alone that is considered, but the
relation of forces to motion. That branch which treats of
pure motion, without reference to the bodies moved or to the
forces which produce the motion, is sometimes called Kine-
matics.
1.] DIIFINITIONS AND INTRODUCTORY PRINCIPLES. 11
Equilibrium.
5. If the forces acting on a body balance each other, that
is, if they c&unteract each other's effects, they are said to be
in equilibrium.
Such a set of forces does not change the state of the body
with respect to rest or motion ; if the body is at rest it will
remain so, or if in motion its motion will remain unchanged,
so far as these forces are concerned.
When forces balance each other through the medium of a
body at rest they are said to be in statical equilibrium ;
when they balance each other through the medium of a mov-
ing body they are in dynamical equilibrium.
Gravity, Weight, Mass, and Density.
6. The earth exercises an attractive force on bodies tending
to draw them towards its centre. This force, which acts on
every particle of a body, is called the force of gravity. If
a body is supported, the force produces a pressure that is
called the "weight of the body. It is obvious then that the
weight of a body varies as the quantity of matter it contains
and as the force of gravity conjointly.
The mass of a body is the quantity of matter it contains.
If we denote the weight of a body by W, its mass by M, and
the force of gravity by g, we have, from what precedes,
W
W = Mg and J/ = — (1)
The density of a body , or the degree of compactness of
its particles, is proportional to the quantity of matter in a
given volume. We may take as the measure of a body's
density, its mass divided by its volume ; or, denoting the
density by d and the volume by F, we have
12 MECHANICS. [*•
M
d = — and M=Vd (2)
Combining (1) and (3), we have
W=:Vdg (3)
The unit of weight that we have adopted is the avoir-
dupois pound as determined by counterpoising it against the
government standard, -and the iinit of mass is the quantity
of matter in sucli a pound.
The force of gravity varies froip point to point, but the
weight of a body, as determined by a spring balance, varies in
the same ratio ; hence, the measure of its mass, W-i- g, re-
mains constant.
The unit of density is the density of distilled water at
39° F.
T7niform and Varied Motion.
T. The velocity of a moving point is its raie of motion.
If a point moves over equal spaces in equal times its velocity
is constant and its motion is uniform ; otherwise its
velocity is variable and its motion is varied. If the velocity
continually increases the motion is accelerated ; if the
velocity continually decreases the motion is retarded.
The unit of velocity is assumed to be the velocity of a
point which moves over one foot in owe second. This is
equivalent to the assumption that the unit of length is one
foot and the unit of time is one second.
In uniform motion, the velocity of a body is the number of
feet passed over by the body in one second ; in varied motion
the velocity at any instant is the number of feet that it would
pass over in one second if its velocity were to remain un-
changed for that time.
. In uniform motion, if we denote the velocity by v, and the
space passed over in t seconds by s, we have
4.] DEFINITIONS AND INTRODUCTOKY PRINCIPLES. 13
' = 1 (^)
From equation (4), we have
s = vt, and t = - (5)
V
Momentnm.
8. The momentum of a body is its quantity of motion.
It is obvious that the quantity of motion of a body, varies
conjointly with the mass of the body and with its velocity ;
hence, the measure of the body's momentum is equal to mv.
The unit of momentum is the momentum of a unit of
mass, moving with a unit of velocity.
Work, Energy.
9. A force is said to perform "work when it overcomes a
resistance. Any kind of work may be assimilated to that of
raising a weight, as in lifting a bucket of water from a well.
In this case it is obvious that the work performed varies con-
jointly as the weight raised and as the height through which
it is raised. Denoting the weight in pounds by W and the
height in feet by h, we have for the measure of the work per-
formed Wh.
The unit of work is the work required to raise_ a weight
of OTie pound through a height of one foot. ■ This unit, which
is termed a physical unit, is denoted by the symbol 1 ft. lb.,
and is called a foot pound. Thus, the work required to raise
7 It's, through 5 ft. is equal to 35 ft. lbs., that is, to 35 foot
pounds.
The rate of work of a force is the number of units of
work it can perform in a given time. In Mechanism, the
rate is usually expressed in terms of a horse power, which
is technically assumed to be 33,000 ft. lbs. per minute or 550
ft. lbs. per second. Thus, an engine of 10 horse power is
14 MECHANICS.
one tliat is capable of performing 5j500 units of work per
second.
Energy is the capacity of a body to perform work : it may
be potential, or kinetic. Thus, the weight of a clock
when wound up has a certain amount of potential energy
which is utilized, as the weight runs down, to keep the clock
train in motion ; a moying body, as the falling hammer of a
pile-driver, has an amount of kinetic energy which is utilized
in performing the work of driving the pile into the ground.
Geometrical Blepresentation of a Force.
10. A force is said to be given when we know its intensity
or magnitude j its point of application, that is, the point
at which it is supposed to act ; and its line of action, that
is, the direction in which it tends to move the point of appli-
cation.
A force is represented geometrically by a straight line
whose length is proportional to its intensity ; „ _^
one extremity as 0, represents the point ^ . ^
of application and an arrow head shows
the direction in which the force is supposed to act.
If a force is applied to a solid body, that is, to a body
whose particles are rigidly connected, the point of application
may be taken at any point on the line of action of the force.
Measure of Forces.
11. A force is measured by comparing it with another force
of the same kind taken as a unit.
Pressures are measured in pounds, the unit being one
avoirdupois pound. When we speak of a pressure of n
pounds we mean a force which, if directed vertically upward,
would just sustain a, weight of n standard pounds.
Moving forces are measured in terms of the momenta they
can generate.
DEFIinTIOXS AND INTRODUCTORY PRINCIPLES. 15
The Timt of an impulsive force is an impulse that can
generate a unit of momentum.
The unit of a constant force is a constant force which
acting on a unit of mass for a unit of time can generate a
unit of momentum.
The measure of a variable force at any instant is the mo-
mentum it could generate in a unit of time if it were to
remain constant for that time.
The unit of pressure may be called a statical unit, and the unit of an
incessant moving force may be called a kinetic unit. Both of these units
are of the same kind : for, from Art. 6 the statical unit, one poimd, is
equal to a v/ait of mass multiplied by g ; but it will be shown hereafter
that the force of gravity acting on a unit of mass for a unit of time will
generate about 33.16 units of momentum: hence the statical unit is
about 33.16 times the kinetic unit. All kinds of forces may therefore be
expressed in terms the kinetic unit.
The Newtonian La.ws of Motion.
13. The following three laws, commonly known as the
Newtonian Laws, which are deduced from universal ex-
perience, are accepted as axiomatic in treating of the motions
of bodies :
First Law. Every body continues in a state of rest
or of uniform motion in a straight line until com-
pelled by impressed forces to change that state.
Second Law. Change of motion is proportional to
the impressed force, and tahes place in the direction
of the straight line in which the force acts.
Third Law. To every action there is always an equal
and contrary reaction: or, the mutual actions of any
two bodies are always equal and oppositely directed.
The first law is equivalent to the assertion that no body
has power of itself to change its state with respect to rest or
motion.
In the second law the term change of motion is enuivalent
16 MECHANICS.
to the expression change of momentum. This law is equivalent
to the assertion that of several forces acting on ajbody each
produces its own efEect as though the others did not exist,
and this whether the body is at rest or in motion. If equal
and opposite forces act on a body the law still holds good :
thus, if a boat is moving up a river with a given velocity and
a body is compelled to move from stem to stern with an equal
velocity, we may regard the body as acted upon by equal and
opposite forces, each of which produces its own efEect ; but
these effects balance each other so that the body remains at
rest with respect to objects on shore.
The third law holds true whether the forces considered are
statical or kinetic. If a heavy body exerts a downward press-
ure on a table, the table exerts an equal upward pressure ; if
the earth exercises an attraction on a stone drawing it down-
ward, the stone exerts an attraction on the earth drawing it
upward, the momentum generated in each case being the
same ; if a moving body A impinges upon a body B which is
free to move, A imparts some of its momentum to B, and the
efEect on A is the same as though it were acted upon by a
force equal and opposite to that exerted by A upon B.
II.— COMPOSITION AND EESOLUTION OP
POECES.
Definitions.
13. Composition of forces, is the operation of finding a
single force whose effect is the same as that of two, or more
given forces. The required force is called the resultant of
the given forces.
Resolution of forces, is the operation of finding two or
more forces whose combined effect is equivalent to that of a
given force. The required forces are called components of
the given force.
Composition of Forces whose directions coincide.
14. Prom the rules laid down for measuring forces, it fol-
lows, that the resultant of two forces applied at a point, and
acting in the same direction, is equal to the sum of the
forces. If two forces act in opposite directions, their result-
ant is equal to their difference, and it acts in the direction of
the greater.
If any number of forces be applied at a point, some in one
direction and others in a contrary direction, their resultant is
equal to the sum of those that act in one direction, diminished
by the sum of those that act in the opposite direction, or call-
ing those that act in one direction plus and those that act in
a contrary direction mimes, the resultant is equal to the alge-
braic sum of the components.
Porces that have a common line of action are called homol-
ogous ; their algebraic sum may be indicated by writing the
expression for one of the forces in a parenthesis and prefixing
18 MECHA.2S'ICS. [«•
the symbol S. Thus, if we denote the resultant of the group
by R and one of the homologous components by P, we have
R = ^ (P), (6)
which is read. The resultant of a set of homologous forces
is equal to their algebraic sum.
The forces treated of in this article and also in the following
articles, are supposed to be applied at points of a solid body.
"When their lines of action intersect, they are said to be con-
current.
Parallelogram of Forces.
15. Suppose two forces, P and Q, to be applied to a solid
body at a point and let them be represented in direction
and intensity by OP and OQ : complete the parallelogram
PQ and draw its diagonal OR.
Let the body contain a unit of mass ; then if the forces are
impulses OP and OQ will represent the
velocities generated by P and Q (Art. _ —yr^
11), and inasmuch as each produces its / ^^ I
own eflEect as though the other did not / ^^
exist (Art. 12), the body will be found /^ ^
at the end of one second somewhere on Kg. 2.
PR by virtue of the force P and some-
where on QR by virtue of the force Q ; it will therefore be at
R. Had been acted on by an impulse represented by OR,
it would in like manner have moved from to ^ in one
second. Hence the impulse OR is equivalent in effect to the
two impulses OP, and OQ ; that is.
If two impulsive forces he represented, hy adjacent
sides of a parallelogram, their resultant will be rep-
resented by that diagonal of the parallelogram which
passes through their commoV' point.
If the forces are constant forces, OP and OQ will represent
COMPOSITION AND EESOLUTION OF FORCES. 19
the yelocities they can generate in a unit of time, and for the
same Reason as before OR will represent a constant force
equivalent in effect to the forces P and Q : hence, the prin-
ciple holds true for constant forces. It is also true for forces
of pressure ; for, if we apply a force equal and directly op-
posed to the resultant of the two moving forces it will hold
them in equilibrium, converting them into forces of pressure,
but it will in no manner change the relation between them
and their resultant. Hence, the principle holds for all kinds
of forces : it may be enunciated as follows :
If two forces he represented in direction and in-
tensity by adjacent sides of a parallelogram, their re-
sultant will be represented by that diagonal of the par-
allelogram which passes through their common point.
This principle is called the parallelogram of forces.
Geometrical Applicatious of the Parallelogram of Forces.
16. 1°. Given two forces ; to find their resultant.
Let OP and 0§ be the given forces.
Complete the parallelogram QP and
draw its diagonal OR ; this will be the
resultant required.
2°. Given, a force and one of its com-
ponents ; to find the other. " Fig. 3.
Let OR be a force and OP one of its
components. Draw PR and complete the parallelogram PQ ;
OQ will be the other component.
3°. Given, a force and the directions of its components ; to
to find the components.
Let OR be a force and OP, OQ, the
directions of its components ; through
R draw RQ and RP parallel to PO and "g^
QO; then will OP and Og be the re- pig. 4.
quired components.
20
MECHANICS.
4°. Given, a force and the intensities of its components ;
to find the directions of the components. *
Let OR be a force, and let the intensities of its components
be represented by lines equal to OP
and OQ ; with as a centre and OP
as a radius, describe an arc, then with
i2 as a centre and OQ as, a. radius,
describe a second arc, cutting the first
at P ; draw OP, and RP, and com-
plete the parallelogram PQ ; OP and OQ will be the re-
quired components.
mg. B.
To construtjt
}?-'->"
Polygon of Forces.
IT. Let OQ, OP, OS, and OT, be a system of forces ap-
plied at a point, 0, and lying in a single plane,
their resultant ; on 0^ and OP con-
struct the parallelogram PQ, and draw
its diagonal OR', this will be the re-
sultant of OP and 0§. In like manner
construct a parallelogram on OR' and
OS; its diagonal OR", will be the
resultant of OP, OQ, and OS. On
OR" and OT construct a parallelogram,
and draw its diagonal OR; then will
OR be the resultant of all the given
forces. This method of construction may be extended to any
number of forces whatever.
If we examine the diagram, we see that QR' is parallel and
equal to OP, R'R" is parallel and equal to OS, R"R is
parallel and equal to OT, and that OR is drawn from the
point of application, 0, to the extremity of R"R. Hence,
we have the following rule for constructing the resultant of
several concurrent forces :
Thrawgh their common point draw a line parallel
Fig. 6.
COMPOSITIOIT AND RESOLUTION OF FORCES. 31
and equal to the first force; through the extremity of
this draw a line parallel and equal to the second
force; and so on, throughout the system; finally, draw
a line from the starting point to the extremity of the
last line draivn, and this will be the resultant re-
quired.
This application of the parallelogram of forces is called the
polygon of forces.
The construction holds true, even when the forces are not
in one plane. In this case, the lines OQ, QR', R'R", &c.,
form a t'wisted polygon, that is, a polygon whose sides are
not in one plane.
When the point R, in the construction, falls at 0, OR re-
duces to 0, and the forces are in equilibrium.
The simplest case of the preceding principle i^ the triangle
of forces. Thus, to find the resultant of P and Q (Fig. 3),
we draw OP parallel and equal to the first force, and from P
we draw PR parallel and equal to the second force ; then the
line OR is the required resultant. If three forces are parallel
and equal to the three sides of a triangle taken in order, the
forces are in equilibrium.
Paxallelopipedon of Forces.
18. Let OP, OQ, and 08, be three concurrent forces
not in the same plane. On these, as
edges, construct the parallelopipedon J... .^
OR, and draw OR, OM, and SR. From /" "'""-^ X i
the principle of Art. 15, OM is the re- f ^^^Ei—^L^p
sultant of OP and 0§ ; and OR is the L/ "--..._^ I /'
resultant of OM and OS; hence, OR f^' "m
is the resultant of OP, OQ, and OS; Fig. 7.
that is.
If three forces be represented by the concurrent edges
of a parallelopipedon, their resultant will be repre-
22
MECHANICS.
[7-
sented by the diagonal of the parallelopipedon that
passes through their common point.
This principle is called the parallelopipedon of forces.
It is easily shown that it is a particular case of the polygon
of forces; for, OP is parallel and equal to the first, PMio
the second, MR to the third force, and OR is drawn from the
origin, 0, to the extremity of MR.
Components of a Force in the direction of Kectangulax Axes.
19. First. To find analytical expressions for the compo-
nents of a force in the direction of two axes.
Let ^J2 be a force in the plane of the
rectangular axes OX and OY. On it as a
diagonal construct a parallelogram ML,
whose sides are parallelogram to OX and
or. Denote AR by R, AL by X, AM,
equal to LR, by Y, and the angle LAR,
equal to the angle the force makes with
OX, by a. From the figure, we have
Pig 8.
X = i2 COS a, and Y := R sma
(7)
In these expressions the angle a is estimated from the
positive direction of the axis of X, around to the force, in
accordance with the rule laid down in Trigonometry. The
component X will have the same sign as cos a, and the com-
ponent I^the same sign as sin «.
Secondly. To find the components
of a force in the direction of three
rectangular axes.
Let OR, denoted by R, be the
given force, and OX, OY, and OZ,
the given axes. On OR, as a diago-
nal, construct a parallelopipedon
whose edges are parallel to the axes. Fig. 9.
8] COMPOSITIOlir AND RESOLDTION OP FOKCES. 23
Then will OL, OM, and ON be the required components.
Denote these by X, Y, and Z, and the angles they make with
OR by a, 13, and y. Join B with L, M, and If, by straight
lines. From the right-angled triangles thus formed, we have
X = E cos a, Y ^:^ R cos (i, and Z = R cos y . . . (8)
The angles a, (i, and y are estimated from the positive direc-
tions of the corresponding axes, as in Trigonometry, and each
component has the same sign as the corresponding cosine.
If a force be resolved in the direction of rectangular axes,
each compoiient will represent the total effect of the given
force in that direction. For this reason such components are
called effective components. It is plain that the compo-
nent in the direction of each axis is the same as the projec-
tion of the force on that axis, the projection being made by
lines through the extremities of the force, and perpendicular
to the axis. Hence, we may find the efEective component of
a force in the direction of a given line, by multiplying the
force into the cosine of its inclination of the line.
It is obvious that the projection of the resultant of two or
more forces on a given line is equal to the algebraic sum of
the projections of its components on that line. It is also ob-
vious that the resultant of two forces is equal to the sum of
the projections of the forces on the direction of the resultant.
Analytical Composition of Rectangular Forces.
30. First. When there are but two
forces. Yj
Let AL and AM he rectangular forces,"
denoted by X and Y, and let AR, de-
noted by R, be their resultant. Denote -
the angle LAR by a. Then, because
ZR = Y, we have, from the triangle A LR, ' Fig. lo.
24
MECHANICS.
[9.
R= 'VX^+Y^; cos«
; and sm a = -5
R
(9)
The first of these gives the intensity, the second and third
the direction of the resultant.
Secondly. When there are three forces not in one plane.
Let OL, OM, and ON, be rec-
tangular forces denoted by X, Y,
and Z, and let OR, denoted by R,
be their resultant. Denote the
angles which R makes with OL,
OM, and ON by a, (i, and y. Then,
from the figure, we have
R = V-S:^+T» + Z». . . (10)
X Y Z
cos «=-=•; cos /3 = -j5 ; and, cos y = -^
KM Ji
Pig. It
(11)
The first gives the intensity of the resultant, the others its
direction.
Examples.
1. Two pressures of 9 and 12 pounds act on a point, and at right
angles to each other. Required, the resultant pressure.
Ans. The resultant pressure is 15 lbs., and it makes an angle of
53° 7' 47" with the direction of the first force.
3. Two rectangular forces are to each other as 3 to 4, and their result-
ant is 20 lbs. What are the intensities of the components ?
Ans. X-1% lbs., and r = 16 lbs.
3. A boat fastened by a rope to a point on shore, is urged by the wind
perpendicular to the current, with a force of 18 pounds, and down the
current by a force of- 22 pounds. What is the tension on the rope, and
what angle does it make with the current ?
Ans. R = 38.425 lbs. ; a = 39° 17' 30".
4. Required the intensity and direction of the resultant of three forces
at right angles to each other, having the intensities 4, 5, and 6 pounds,
respectively.
12.J COMPOSITION AKD RESOLUTION- OF FORCES. 25
Ans. R = Vl6 + ^35 + 36 = 8.775 lbs. ; and a = 62° 52' 51" ;
P = 55° 15' 50" ; 7 = 46° 51' 43".
5. Three forces at right angles are to each other as 2, 3, and 4, and
their resultant is 60 lbs. What are the intensities of the forces ?
Ans. 22.284 lbs., 33.426 lbs., and 44.568 lbs.
Application to Groups of Concnrrent Forces.
31. The principles explained in the preceding articles,
enable us to find the resultant of any number of concurrent
forces. Let P, P', P", &c., be a group of concurrent forces.
Call the angles they make with the axis of X, a, a', a", &c. ;
the angles they make with the axis of Y, /3, j3', jS", &c. ; and
the angles they make with the axis of Z, y, y', y", &c. Re-
solve each force into rectangular components parallel to the
axes, and denote the resultants of the groups parallel to the
axes by X, Y, and Z. We have, (Art. 19),
X=2(Pcos«), r=2(Pcos;3), Z^-S.{P cosy).
If we denote the resultant by R, and the angles it makes
with the axes by a, b, and c, we have, as in Article 30,
R = VXa + Y^ + Z\
cos a = -S-, cosb = n", and cos c = -^ (IZ)
When the given forces lie in the plane XY, Z reduces to 0,
cos j3 becomes sin a, cos b becomes sin a, and the formulas
reduce to
X = S (P cos «), and Z= S (P sin a).
j^ Y
R = '/X^ + F^ and cos at = •^, and sin a = -^ . . . (13)
Examples.
1. Three concurrent forces, whose intensities are 50, 40, and 70, lie in
the same plane, and make with an axis, angles equal to 15°, 30°, and 45°.
Re.qJ^ir^d th^ resultant.
26
MECHANICS.
[14.
Here, X = 50 cos 15° + 40 cos 30° + 70 cos 45° = 132.435,
and r = 50 sin 15° + 40 sin 30° + 70 sin 45° = 83.44.
Am. R = 156, and A = 31° 54' 13".
3. Three forces, 4, 5, and 6, lie in the same plane, and make equal
angles with each other. Required the intensity of their resultant and
the angle it makes with the least force.
Ans. B = VS, and a = 310°.
3. Two forces, one of 5 lbs. and the other of 7 lbs., are applied at the
same point, and make with eaich other an angle of 130°. What is the
• intensity of their resultant. Ans. 6.34 lbs.
Formula for the Resultant of Two Forces.
33. Let F and P', be two concurrent forces, and let the
axis of JT be taken to coincide with F ; a will then be 0, and
we shall have sin et = 0, and cos « = 1.
The value of Xwill be P + P' coses', and
the value of Fwill be P'sin«'. Squar-
ing these values, substituting in Equation
(9), and reducing by the relation sin^ a'
+ cos^ a = 1, we have ^e- la
R=VF^+P'^ + 2PF' cos a' (14)
The angle a' is the angle between the given forces. Hence,
The resultant of two concurrent forces is equal to the
square root of the sum of the square f of the forces, jjlus
twice the product of the forces into the cosine of their
included angle.
If a = 0, we have E = P + P'.
If a' = 180°, we have R=P — P'.
Examples.
1. Two forces, P and Q, are equal to 34 and 30, and the angle between
them is 105°. What is the intensity of their resultant ?
Ans. R = 33.31.
16.]
COMPOSITION AKD EESOLUTION OF FORCES.
27
3. Two forces, P and Q, whose intensities are 5 and 13, have a result-
ant whose intensity is 13. Eequired the angle between them.
Ans. Cos a = 0, or a = 90°.
3. A boat is impelled by the current at the rate of 4 miles per hour,
and by the wind at the rate of 7 miles per hour. What will be her rate
per hour when the direction of the wind makes an angle of 45° with that
of the current ? Ans. B = 10.3m.
4. Two forces, and their resultant, are all equal. What is the angle
between the two forces f Ans. 120°.
5. Two forces at right angles are to each other as 1 is to Vs, and their
resultant is 10 lbs. What are the forces 1 ' Ans. 5 and 5 ^.
6. If three forces are to each other as 1, 3, and 3, and are in equilib-
rium, show that the forces act along the same straight line.
Relation Between Two Forces and their Resultant.
33. Let P and Q be two forces, and R their resultant.
Then because QP is a parallelogram,
the side PR is equal to Q. From the
triangle ORP, we have,
P-.q-.R-.-.wa. ORP : sin ROP : sin OPR.
But,
ORP=QOR, and OPR=180° — QOP ;
hence,
P : Q -.R :: sin QOR : sin ROP : sin QOP ; . . . . (15)
That is, of two forces and their resultant, each is pro-
portional to the sine of the angle between the other two.
If we apply a force R' equal and directly opposed to R, the
forces P, Q, and R' will be in equi-
librium. The angle QOR is the sup-
plement of QOR', and POR is the
supplement of POR' ; hence,
sin QOR= sin QOR',
and sin POR = sin POR' ;
we have also, R = R'.
Pig. 13.
Fig. 14.
28 MECHAKICS. [16-
Making these substitutions in the preceding proportion, we
have,
P :Q:R' : : sin QOR' : sin FOR' : sin QOP .... (16)
Hence, if three forces are in equilibrium, each is -pro-
portional to the sine of the angle between the other two.
Examples.
1. A weight of 50 lbs., suspended by a string, is drawn aside by a hori-
zontal force until the string makes an angle of 30° with the vertical.
Required the value of the horizontal force, and the tension of the string.
Ans. 28.8675 lbs., and 57.735 lbs.
2. A point is kept in equilibrium by three forces of 6 lbs., 8 lbs., and
11 lbs. ; what are the angles between the forces?
Ans. 77° 21' 53", 147° 50' 34", and 134° 47' 34".
3. A weight of 25 lbs. is attached to the ends of two strings whose
lengths are 3 and 4 ft., the other ends of the strings being attached at
points of a horizontal beam which are 5 ft. apart. What are the tensions
of the strings? Ans. 30 lbs., and 15 lbs.
Translation ; Rotation ; Principle of Moments.
34. A body is said to have a motion of translation
when all of its points move in parallel straight lines : it has
a motion of rotation when its points move in arcs of circles
whose centres are in a straight line ; this line is called the
axis of rotation, and any plane perpendicular to it is called
a plane of rotation.
If a body is restrained by a fixed
axis, any force applied to it, whose
line of action does not intersect the
axis, will tend to impart a motion of
rotation.
Let P be a force acting on a body
which is restrained by an axis OZ. -,, „
•' rig. 16.
Draw a line AB, perpendicular to
the force and also to the axis. Let A be taken as the point
COMPOSITION AKD RESOLUTION OF FOECES. 29
of application of the force, and at this point resolve it into
two components P" and P', the former parallel, and the
hAA&v perpendicular to OZ. The component P" can have no
tendency to produce rotation about the axis ; hence, P',
which is the projection of P on a plane of rotation, is the
only component that is effective in producing rotation.
It is obvious that the tendency of P' to produce rotation
varies conjointly with P' and with AB ; we may therefore
take the product P' x ^5 as the measure of the tendency of
the force P to produce rotation around OZ : this product is
called a moment. Hence, the moment of a force with
respect to an axis is the product of the projection of the force
on a plane of rotation by the distance of the force from the
axis. Let us first consider the case in which the forces lie in
a plane of rotation.
Let P and Q be two forces applied ^ ^_,-,yH
at 0, and let R be their resultant.
Suppose also that is a point of a
solid body which is restrained by an
axis perpendicular to the plane POQ
at C ; from G draw perpendiculars
to P, Q, and R, denoting them re-
spectively by j», q, and r.
Take the line OC as the axis of X, and the perpendicular
OYas. the axis of Y; denote the angle XOP by «, XOQ'bj
P, and XOR by ^. Because R is the resultant of P and Q,
the projection of R on the axis of Y is equal to the sum of
the projections of P and Q on the same axis (Art. 19), that is,
E sin ) = P sin « + Q sin (3,
or, multiplying through by OC, we have,
i?(OCsin^) = P(OCsina) + Q (00 sin P);
but, OCsin^ = r, 00 sin a -p, and OCBin^ = g';
whence, Rr = Pp + Qq . . ■ ■ (a)
30 MECHANICS. [*'•
The signs of r, p, and q, depend upon the values of
-P
lever arm of the resultant will / i^^
be 0, and we shall have, from gc^ i — s-b,
the principle of moments Mg.ao.
(Art. 24),
P X CL=Q^CN;
or, P : Q:: GN: CL.
But, from the similar triangles CNS and LNM, we have,
ON: CL:: SN : SM.
Combining the two proportions, we have,
P : Q :: SN: SM.
That is, the line of direction of the resultant divides
the line joining the points of application of the compo-
nents, inversely as the components.
From the last proportion, we have, by composition,
P : Q: P + Q:: SN: SM: SN+ SM;
and, by division,
P : Q : P— Q :: SN: SM: SN—SM.
In the first case (Fig. 19), P + Q = B, ani SN + SM
— MN; in the second case (Fig. 20), P — Q = R, and
SN — SM = MN. Substituting in the preceding propor-
tions, we have,
P : Q : R:: SN: SM: MN;
or, P : Q: R:: ON: CL: NL (18)
That is, of two parallel forces and their resultant, each
is proportional to the distance between the other two.
Two equal parallel forces acting in contrary directions but
34
MECHANICS.
not directly opposed constitute a couple; the distance be-
tween them is the lever arm of the couple. Prom what
precedes we see that the resultant of a couple is 0, and that
its point of application is at an infinite distance. It is easily
shown that the tendency of a couple to produce rotation
around an axis perpendicular to the plane of the forces is
equal to either force into the lever arm of the couple.
Composition of Parallel Forces.
26. 1°. To find the resultant of two
parallel forces lying in the same direc-
tion :
Let P and Q be the forces, M and N
their points of application. Make
MQ' = Q, and iVP' = P ; draw P'Q'
cutting MIf in S; through S draw SR
parallel to MP, and make it equal to
J" + ^ ; it will be the resultant. .
For, from the triangles P'SJSTand Q'SM,
we have.
^^-.,4-
<2'
f
fN
B
Fig. 21.
P'JSr : Q'M ■.■.8N: SM ; or, P : Q:: SN: SM.
3°. To find the resultant of two parallel forces acting in
opposite directions :
Let P and Q be the forces, M and JV" their
points of application. Prolong QN till
NA = P, and make MB = Q ; draw AB,
and produce it till it cuts JVM produced in
S; draw SR parallel to MP, and equal to
BP, it will be the resultant required.
For, from the triangles SIfA and SMB,
we have.
M
P
Pig. 22.
AN : BM : : SN : SM; or, P : Q :: SN: SM.
F
COMPOSITION XNO EESOLUTIOST OF FOKCES. 35
These constructions, which are essentially the same, suggest
the methods of resolving a force into two parallel components,
applied at given points.
3°. To find the resultant of any number of parallel forces :
Let P, P', P", P'", be parallel forces. Find .the resultant
of P and P', by the rule already given,
it will be ^' = P + P' ; find the result- „^ .--'1
ant of R' and P", it will be P" = P + .-'"^'"'if f T p-
P' + P" ; find the resultant of R" and T
P'", it will be P = P + P' + P" + P'". p
If there be a greater number of forces,
the operation of composition may be
continued ; the final result will be the " '
resultant of the system. If some of the j,. ^
forces act in contrary directions, com-
bine all that act in one direction, as just explained, and call
their resultant R' ; then combine all that act in a contrary
direction, and call their resultant R" ; finally, combine R'
and R" ; their resultant, R, will be the resultant of the
system.
If the forces P, P', etc., be turned about their points of
application, their intensities remaining unchanged, and their
directions remaining parallel, the forces R', R", R, will also
turn about fixed points, continuing parallel to the given
forces. The point through which R always passes is called
the centre of parallel forces.
Co-ordinates of the Centre of Parallel Forces.
37. Let P, P', P", etc., be parallel forces, applied at
points that maintain fixed positions with respect to a system
of rectangular axes, and let R, equal to S (P), be their re-
sultant. Denote the co-ordinates of the points of application
of the forces by x,y,z; x', y, z', etc. ; and those of R by
K,, «/„ Zi-
36
MECHANICS.
[19.
Turn the forces about their points of application, till they
are parallel to the axis of F, and in that position find their
moments with respect to the axis of Z. In this position the
lever arms of the forces are x, x', etc., and the lever arm of
R is Xx. From the principle of moments (Art. 34), we have,
Rxt =z Px+ P'x' + , etc.
or,
-IW <"'
By making the forces in like manner parallel to the axis of
Z, and taking their moments with respect to the axis of X,
we have.
yi =
^iPy)
S (P) •
And in like manner, we find,
S(P.)
2l =
X(P)
(30)
(31)
Forces Applied at Points Invariably Connected.— Tendency to
Produce Translation.
38, Let P, P', P", etc., be forces situated in any manner
in space an^ applied at points that are invariably connected,
as, for example, to points of the
same solid body. Assume any point ^
0, and through it draw any three
lines, OX, OY, and OZ, at right
angles to each other, and take these
lines as axes. Denote the angles
that P, P', P", etc., make with the
axis of X by a, a', a", etc. ; the
angles they make with the axis of
YhjPjfi', fi", etc.; and the angles
they make with the axis of Z by y, y', y", etc. ; also denote
the co-ordinates of their points of application by x, y, z;
Fig. 24.
COMPOSITION AND liESOLCTION OF FOEOES. 37
«', y', z' ; x", y", z", etc. Then let each force be resolved into
components parallel to the axes, as shown in Pig. 34.
We have for the group parallel to the axis of X,
J" cos a, P' cos a', F" coa a", etc.;
for the group parallel to the axis of Y,
P cos 0, P' cos P', P" COS P", etc.;
and, for the group parallel to the axis of Z,
P COS y, P' cos y', P" cos y", etc.
Denoting the resultants of these several groups by X, Y,
and Z, we have
X = 2 (Poos a), F = S (Pcos (i), and Z = S (Pcos y).
Now, when the system of forces does not reduce to a couple,
it must have a single resultant, that is, X, Y, and Z must in-
tersect at a common point whose co-ordinates may be denoted
by «!, yi, and 2j, the values of which may be found as in the
last article.
Forces Applied at Points Invariably Connected.— Tendency to
Produce Rotation.
39. Continuing the supposition of the last article, we see
that X acts with a lever arm y^, to produce negative rotation
around the axis of Z, and that Y acts with a lever arm a;, to
produce positive rotation around the same axis ; hence, the
entire tendency to rotation around the axis of Z is
Yx, - Xy,.
But Yxi = 'S.{P cos |3 x) and Xy^ = S, {P coa ct y) ; hence, the
preceding expression becomes
S(Pcosj32;) — S(Pcos ccy).
In like manner it may be shown that the tendency to pro-
38 MECHANICS. [22-
duce rotation around the axis of X is measured by the ex-
pression
S (Pcos y y) — S (Pcos /32).
Also, the tendency to rotation around the axis of Y is meas-
ured by the expression,
S (P cos a «) — 2 (P cos y x).
Equilibrium.
30. The system will be in equilibrium when there is no
tendency to motion of translation in the direction of either
axis, and when there is no tendency to rotation around either
axis, hence we must have (Arts. 38, 39),
2 (Pcos a) = 0, \
S (Pcos i3) = 0, 1 (22)
S (Pcosy) = 0- ) ,
S (Pcos |8a;) — S (Pcos a y) = 0, |
S (Pcos y «/) — S (Pcos i3 «) = 0, V (23)
S (Pcos « «) — ^ (Pcos y a;) = 0. )
Hence, the conditions of equilibrium are,
1st. Tlve algebraic sum of the components of the
forces in the direction of any three rectangular axes
inust be separately equal to 0.
2d. Tfie algebraic sum of the moments of the forces,
with respect to any three rectangular axes, must be
separately equal to 0.
Case of a Body Restrained by a Fixed Axis.
31. If a body is restrained by a fixed axis, about which it
is free to revolve, we may take this line as the axis of X.
Since the axis is fixed, there can be no motion of translation,
neither can there be any rotation about either of the other
two axes of co-ordinates. All of Equations (23), and the first
24.] COitPOSITIOK AlfD KESOLUTIOJf OF FOECES. 39
and third of Equations (23), will be satisfied by virtue of the
connection of the body with the fixed axis. The second of
Equations (23) is, therefore, the only one that must be satis-
fied by the relation between the forces. "We must have,
therefore,
Z {F cos y y — Pcoa p z) = (24)
That is, if a body is restrained by a fixed axis, the forces
applied to it will be in equilibrium when the algebraic sum
of the moments of the forces with respect to this axis
is equal to 0.
Quantity of "Work.— Theorem of "Work.
32. It was shown in Art. 9 that the work performed by a
force whose line of action coincides with that of the resistance
is equal to tJie force multiplied by the space through which it
acts. It remains to consider the case in which a force acts
obliquely to the resistance.
Let P be a force acting on a body which is compelled to
move along the line AB ; suppose
the body to move over the infinites-
imal distance 00 in the element of
time dt. Draw €p perpendicular to
P, and PP' perpendicular to AB ; ^ Pig. 23.
denote Op by 6p, the angle BOP by
a, and let the quantity of work performed in the time dt be
called the elementary quantity of loork.
Now OP', equal to P cos a, is the effective confponent of P
in the direction of AB, and the work that it performs is equal
to P cos « X 00, or P X 00 cos a ; but 00 cos a is equal to
Sp, and consequently the elementary quantity of work of P is
equal to PSp. Here Sp falls on the force and the work is
assumed to be positive.
If is constrained by the action of other forces to describe
40 MECHANICS. [25.
the path OC, then will 6p fall on the prolongation of P and
the elementary quantity of work of P will obviously be nega-
tive.
The distance 6p is sometimes called the virtual velocity
of P, and the product P6p the virtTial moment of P.
Let P and Q be two forces applied
to a point of a solid body and let
R be their resultant ; and suppose
that is constrained to move over an
infinitesimal distance OC in the time
dt. Prom C draw perpendiculars Cp
to P, Gq to Q, and Cr to R, denoting
Op by 6p, Oq by 6q, and Or by 6r.
Take the line OCas the axis of X, and the perpendicular
OT as the axis of Y; denote the angle XOP by a, XOQ by
/3, and XOR by 0. Then because R is the resultant of P and
Q the projection of R -on the axis of X is equal to the sum of
the projections of P and Q on the same axis, that is,
R cos 1^ = P cos t« + § cos |3,
or, multiplying through by OG, we have
72 (0(7 cos ^) = P(00'cos«) = §(00 008/?);
but, OG cos = dr, 00 cos «s = rfjo, and 00 cos (i =: 6q;
hence,
^ (28)
''-■^- w
In using these formulas for finding the co-ordinates of the
centre of gravity we take the axes of co-ordinates so as to get
the simplest results (Art. 36) ; we also take the integrals be-
tween such limits as to include the entire magnitude.
Centre of Gravity of a Straight Line.
38. Let AB be a straight line whose length is I. Assume
the direction of AB as the axis of
X, A as the origin, and let any dis-
tance from A, ss ADjhe denoted by
x; then will dm be equal to dx.
Substituting in (38) (which is the Fjg. i
only formula required) and taking
the integral between the limits and I, we have,
I xdx
^i = '4 = ¥ (31)
Hence, the centre of gramty is at the middle point
of the line, as was previously shown.
46
MECHAlSriCS.
[32.
Centre of Gravity of a Triangle.
39. Let ABO he a plane triangle ; draw a line from the
vertex A to ^the middle of the base BC, and take this as the
axis of X; and let A be the
origin. ^^ is a line of sym-
metry, and consequently it will
pass through the centre of grav-
ity. At a distance from A equal
to X draw BS parallel to BC,
and at an additional distance dx
draw a second parallel. The area
between these consecutive parallels is equal to dm. Now, if
we denote BG hy h and AFhy h, we have, from the similar
triangle ADE and ABC,
Fig. 31.
h : b :: X : DE, or DE = j-x.
h
The area of dm is therefore equal to
h
X X dx sin a,
a being the angle AFC. Substituting this in (38), dropping
the constant factor, and integrating between the limits and
li, we have
/
x^dx
r
xdx
(32)
Hence, the centre of gravity of a triangle is on a
line drawn from the vertex to the middle of the base
and two thirds of the distance from the vertex to the
base.
33.] CENTRE OF GBAVITT ANT) STABILITY. 47
Centre of Gravity of a Pjrramid or Cone.
40. Let ABODE be any pyramid and let AG he & line
from its vertex to the centre of
gravity of its base. Take AO &a
the axis of X, and denote the area
of the base by h; also denote AG
by A.
Now, we may regard the pyramid
as made up of slices formed by ^'
planes parallel to the base, and whose distances apart, esti-
mated along AG, are equal to dx; the actual thickness of
each slice is dx x sin a, a being the angle between A G and
the base. It is obvious from the principles of Geometry that
A G will pass through the centre of gravity of each slice ;
hence, the centre of gravity of the pyramid will be on A G.
At a distance from A denoted by x pass a plane parallel to
the base, and at an additional distance dx pass a second
parallel plane ; the volume included by these planes will be
dm. Denoting the section of the first of these planes by b',
we shall have
I -.V -.-.W : x\ or 5' = \a?.
Hence, the magnitude of the corresponding slice is equal to
jx'dx sin a. Substituting this for dm in (38), striking out
the common constant factor, and integrating from to h, we
have
ph
I x^dx
/ x^dx
Jo
Hence, the centre of gravity of a piframid is on a
48 MECHANICS. [34-
line drawn from the vertex to the centre of gravity
of the base, and at three fourths of the distance from
the vertex to the base.
The demonstration is applicable to any pyramid or cone.
Centre of Gravity of an Arc of a Circle.
41, Let ABG be an arc whose
radius is r, and let the origin be at the
centre 0. Take the axis of X perpen-
dicular to the chord A G, in which case
it will be a line of symmetry. Denote
the semi-angle of the arc by a and any
variable angle, BOK, by 0. Now, if
we give to B the constant increment dQ, Kg. 33.
the difiEerential of the arc, or dm, will
be equal to rdQ and its lever arm OL, or x, will be equal to
r cos Q. Substituting in (38) and integrating from = — « to
fl = -f a, we have
fy
^03 Odd g^,^.^^
/:
rdO ^^"
(34)
But ^r sin a = AC, and 2ra — arc ABO; hence,
X, = 7-kty. or arc ABC : AC :: r : x,.
arc ABC
That is, the centre of gravity of an arc of a circle
is on the diameter which bisects its chord, and its dis-
tance from the centre is a fourth proportional to the
arc, chard, and radius.
When a = ^tt, or 90°, the are becomes a semi-circumfer-
ence, sin a = 1, and equation (34) gives
Xy = — .
35.]
CENTKB or GRAVITY AND STABILITY.
49
Centre of Gravity of one Branch of a Cycloidal Arc. '
43. Let ODX be one branch of a eycloid whose base is
OX and whose axis is OD. Let
the axis of X coincide with the
base and let the axis of Y be paral-
lel to the axis of the curve ; then,
(Calculus, p. 100), will CD be a
line of symmetry. Any element
K of the curve will be equal to
^fS^ + dy^, or substituting for dx, its value (Gale, p. 100)
and reducing, we have
dm = a/^t (3r — «/)-* dy.
Substituting in (29), suppressing the common constant factor
and integrating from y = to y ^^ 2r, we have
Vi
J^i^r-yyUy
|r- = f (2r-)
(35)
NoVe.— The numerator is reduced by Formula A, and the integration
is completed by formula [29] Calculus, giving
N=l(^-yfy-ir(^r-y)K
The denominator is integrated by formula [39], giving
i? = -3(3r-y)*.
For y =r 0, iV" = - |r -v/Sr. and D = - 3 v^ ; for y = 3r both iVand
D are : hence, the result given in (35).
The value of yy is the distance of the centre of gravity of
OKD from the axis of X, but by reason of symmetry it is
also the distance of the centre of gravity of XE'D from the
same axis.
50
MECHANICS.
[36.
Hence, the centre of gravity of the entire curve is on
the axis of the curve and at a distance from the base
equal to f GZ).
Centre of Gravity of a Sector of a Circle. y
43. Let -40(7 be the sector; let the axis of J' bisect it
and assume the same notation as in
Art. 41. In this case dm is equal to
the elementary sector OXL and its
value is ^rMO : because this sector may
be regarded as a triangle, its centre of
gravity is two thirds of the distance
from to JT, and consequently its lever
arm x is equal to fr cos 6. Substi-
tuting in (28), suppressing the com-
mon constant factor, and integrating
from — B to -|- «, we have
Fig. 35.
X, =
./—a
cos 6
de
|r-
(36)
If a = |-7r (or 90°), the sector becomes a semicircle, sin «
= 1, and we have
ir
If we make dm equal to the second differential of a magni-
tude, the position of the centre of gravity is found by double
integration.
Centre of Gravity of a Sector of a Circular Ring.
44. A circular ring is bounded by two arcs of concentric
circles and by two radii, as BOG'B'. Take the origin at the
centre of the pirplg ; ^PRote the radius of the outer circle by
37.]
CENTEE OF GBAVITT AND STABILITY.
51
r, that of the inner circle by r', the angle XOGhy a' and the
angle XOB by a.
Draw any radius between r and r',
as OL, and denote the angle which it
makes with the axis of X by B. If
we increase d by dO, and draw the
corresponding radius OL', the part
of the ring between these radii will
be its first differential. Now take
any distance OK greater than r' and
less than r and denote it by 2 : describe two arcs, one with
the radius z and the other with the radius z + dz; the part
of the first differential included between these arcs will be the
second differential oiBOG'B'. Eegarding this as a rectangle,
its length is zdd and its breadth is dz and its area, dhn, is equal
to zdzd& ; furthermore, its leyer arm x is equal to z cos d.
Substituting these values for dm and x in (28), and taking
the double integral between the limits indicated, we have
a;, =
pa. pr
J a' Jt'
zHz cos ddd
r r i^dzdd
Ja' Jr'
2r^—i
2 r^_--r^ y^
cos QdQ
Jo!
sm a — sin «
3 r» — r'«
(37)
Because the centre of gravity is on the bisecting line of the
sector, the value of a^i is sufficient to determine it. If we
make «' = — \'n, « = ^tt and r' = 0, we have as before,
4r
^1 - Btt"
Centre of Gravity of a Semi-Ellipsoid.
45. Let the axis of X be taken to coincide with the axis
of the ellipsoid, the origin being at the centre, and suppose
52
MECHANICS.
[38.
the volume to be generated by reyolving a semi-ellipse
around its transverse axis. The elementary volume will be
a slice perpendicular to the axis of X, whose radius is y and
whose thickness is dx. The value of y^ taken from the equa-
tion of the ellipse is —^(c? — oP) ; hence,
dm, = TtyMx = TT -J (p? — a;') dx.
Substituting this in (28), striking out the common constant
factor, and integrating from a; = to a; = a, we have.
/ (a^ — a;2) x dx
/ (fl^ — a:^) dx
X, =
= *a
(38)
That is, the centre of gravity of a semi-prolate sphe-
roid is on its axis and at a distance from the centre
equal to three-eighths of the transverse axis of the me-
ridian curve.
Centre of Gravity of a Trirectangnlar Spherical Pyramid.
46. Let be the centre of sphere whose radius is r, and
let A 00, AOB, and BOO be
three rectangular planes. The
volume bounded by these planes
and the trirectangnlar spherical
triangle, ABO, is the pyramid in
question. Let A OD be any angle
(p, and through OD pass a plane,
DOO, cutting the base of the
pyramid in the quadrant, OD ;
draw OE, making the angle DOE
equal to d, and through 0-E'pass
Fig. 87.
39.] CENTRE OF GKAVITY AND STABILITY. 53
the plane EOC; the semi- wedge hetween these planes is the
first differential of the pyramid.
Draw a radius, OF, making the angle BOF equal to 0,
and also the consecutive radius ON, making FON equal to
dB ; then draw arcs of small circles through F and N, cutting
the arc CE in K and L ; the elementary pyramid determined
by the radii to F, N, K, and L, is the second differential of the
pyramid.
The arc FK is equal to ED cos = rd4> X cos d, and NF
is equal to rdd ; hence, the area of the base of the elementary
pyramid, regarded as a rectangle, is r^ cos 6 dO d, and because
its altitude is r, the volume of the pyramid is given by the
equation,
d^ = \r^ cos 6 dO d^.
The centre of gravity of the pyramid is at a distance from
equal to three fourths of r ; hence, the co-ordinate x of this
point is given by the equation,
X = ^reos 6 cos ^.
Substituting these values in (28), striking out the common
constant factor, and taking the double integral between the
limits of the figure, we have,
/ I '"' COS* d dO cos ^ d(f>
/ I CO8 dd d^
Note. — From example 8, p. 151, Calculus, we have at once,
fco&^ edd = i (cos sin e + e).
From the principle of symmetry we see that y^ and z^ are each equal to
|r. The centre of gravity is on the radius that is equally inclined to
OA, OB, and 00, and its distance from is equal to Va>i' + 2/1* + Zi',
or to f r ^.
54 MECHAKICS. [40-
The Centrobaric llethod.
47. If we clear equation (29) of fractions, and multiply
both members by ^tt, we have,
27r^i fdm = /'^■nydm (a)
First, let m be a plane curve ; then will dm be equal to
'^dx^ H- dy'^, and (a) becomes, after limiting the curve by
the ordinates a and h,
2ny^ r (da? + dy^)^ = f* '^■ny {da? + dy^)^ (40)
Eeferring to the Calculus, pp. 91-92, we see that the first
member of this equation is 27ryi multiplied by the length of
a definite portion of a plane curve ; and that the second
member is the surface generated by revolving that portion of
the curve around the axis of X.
Hence, the area of a surface of revolution is equal to
the length of its generating arc multiplied by the cir-
cumference described by its centre of gravity.
Secondly, let m be a plane area ; then will dm = ydx, and
the ydm of (29) will equal ^y x ydx, and we shall have, as
before,
27r«/i / ydx = / "Ky^dx (41)
The first member of this equation is 27ryj multiplied by a
definite plane area, and the second member is the volume
generated by revolving this area around the axis of X.
Hence, the volume of a solid of revolution is equal to
its generating area multiplied by the circumference,
described by its centre of gravity.
These principles may be used for finding the measure of
4a.] CBNTEE OF GRAVITY AND STABILITY. 55
surfaces and solids of reyolution, or, in certain cases, for
finding the centres of gravity of their generating magnitudes.
We are only concerned with the latter.
To illustrate the manner of applying the rules just deduced,
let us take the following examples :
1°. Centre of gravity of a semicircular arc. — The surface
generated by revolving it about its diameter is ^ni^, and the
length of the semicircle is wr ; hence, from (40),
%r
inr^ := 277^1 X T^r, or y^ = — (43)
2°. Centre of gravity of a cycloidal arc. — The surface gen-
erated by revolving one branch of the arc around its base is
64
(Calc, p. 167), -5-Trr^, and the length of the branch is (Oalc,
p. 158), 8r ; hence, from (40),
^TTrS = 277^1 X 8r, or yi = ^r = |(2r) (43)
3°. Centre of gravity of the area of a semicircle. — The vol-
. 4
ume generated by revolving it around its diameter is ^wr*,
and the area of the semicircle is ^tti^ ; hence, from (40),
Irrrs = 27r«/i X ^nr^ or «^i = 3^ (44)
4°. Centre of gravity of the area of one branch of a cycloid. —
The volume generated by revolving it around its base is
(Calc, p. 170), 5TrV, and the area of the branch is (Calc, p.
163), Srrr*; hence, from (40),
5 5
hn^r^ = 27iyi X S^r*, or yi = -^r = -^{^r).
Note.— The centre of gravity is on tlie line of symmetry in each case.
56
MECHANICS.
Experimental Determination of the Centre of Gravity.
48. In certain cases the approximate position of the
centre of gravity of a body may be found with sufficient
accuracy as follows : Attach a string at
any point G, and suspend the body by
it ; when the body comes to rest, mark
the direction of the string ; then suspend
the body by a second point, B, and when
it comes to rest, mark the direction of
the string ; the point of intersection, G, p.
will be the centre of gravity of the body.
Instead of suspending the body by a string, it may be bal-
anced on a point. In this case, the weight acts vertically
downward, and is resisted by the reaction of the point ; hence,
the centre of gravity lies vertically over the point.
If, therefore, a body be balanced at any two points of its
surface, and verticals be drawn through the points in these
positions, their intersection will be the centre of gravity of
the body.
Centre of Gravity by Composition.
49. When we know the centres of gravity of two or more
bodies, or parts of the same body, and the weights of each,
the centre of gravity of the whole may be found by the
method of composition ; thus, if A and B are the centres of
gravity of two bodies whose weights are W and W, the
weights being parallel forces, their resultant, W + W, will
be applied at that point oi AB which divides it into seg-
ments that are inversely as the forces. If, for example,
the weight of ^ is 9 lbs., and that oi B 1 lbs., we divide
AB into 16 equal parts, and lay off 7 of these from A
towards B, which will determine the centre of gravity of
A and B.
CENTEE OF GRAVIXY AND STABILITY. 57
K the two bodies are homogeneous^ we may use their
magnitudes instead of their weights.
Having found the common centre of gravity of A and B,
we may compound it with C in the same manner, and so on
till all the bodies have been considered.
As an example, let it be required to And the centre of
gravity of a polygon as A, i?/ C, B, E.
Divide it into triangles, and find the
centre of gravity of each triangle. The
weights of these triangles are proportional
to their areas, and may be represented by
them. Let 0, 0', 0", be the centres of
gravity of the triangles into which the ^' ^'
polygon is divided. Join and 0', and find a. point 0'",
such that
0' 0'" : 00'" :: ABC : AOD ;
then will 0'" be the centre of gravity of the triangles ABG
and ^ CD.
Join 0" and 0'", and find a point, G, such that
0"'G : 0"G :: ADE : ABG + AGD ;
then will G be the centre of gravity of the polygon.
To find the centre of gravity of a polyhedron ; if we take a
point within and join it with each vertex of the polyhedron,
we shall form as many pyramids as the solid has faces ; the
centre of gravity of each pyramid may be found by the rule.
If the centres of gravity of the first and second pyramid be
joined by a straight line, the common centre of gravity of the
two may be found by a process similar to that used in finding
the centre of gravity of a polygon, observing that the weights
of the pyramids are proportional to their volumes, and may
be represented by them. Having compounded the weights
58 MECHANICS.
of the first and second, and found its point of application,
we may, in like manner, compound the weight of these two
with that of the third, and so on ; the last point of applica-
tion will be the centre of gravity of the polyhedron.
Composition by the Method of Moments.
50. When we have several bodies, and it is required to
find their common centre of gravity, it will often be found
convenient to employ the principle of moments. To do this,
we first find the centre of gravity of each body separately,
by rules already given. The weight of each body is then
regarded as a force, applied at the centre of gravity of the
body. The weights being parallel, we have a system of
parallel forces, whose points of application are known. If
these points are all in the same plane, we find the lever arms
of the resultant of all the weights, with respect to two lines,
at right angles to each other in that plane ; and these will
make known the point of application of the resultant, or,
what is the same thing, the centre of gravity of the system.
If the points are not in the same plane, the lever arms of the
resultant are found, with respect to three axes, at right
angles to each other ; these make known the point of appli-
cation of the resultant weight, or the position of the centre
of gravity.
The methods of applying this and the preceding article
are illustrated by the following :
Examples.
1. Required the point of application of the resultant of three equal
weights, applied at the vertices of a plane triangle.
Solution. — ^Let A, B, and C be the vertices of the triangle and Z) the
middle of BG. The resultant of the weights at B and C will be applied
at -D. The resultant of the three weights will be applied at a point O of
AI), and because the weight at D is twice that at A the distance AQ'm
CENTEB OF GRAVITY AND STABILITY. 59
f?wo thirds of AD, that is, the required point is at the centre of gravity
of the triangle.
2. Required the point of application of the resultant of a system of
equal parallel forces, applied at the vertices of a regular polygon.
Ans. At the centre of the polygon.
3. Parallel forces of 3, 4, 5, and 6 lbs. are applied at the successive
vertices of a square, whose side is 13 inches. At what distance from the
first vertex is the point of application of their resultant?
Solution. — Take the sides of the square through the first vertex as
axes ; call the side through the first and second vertex, the axis of X
and that through the first and fourth, the axis of Y. We shall have,
from Formulas (28, 29),
4 X 13 + 5 X 12 -
x, = jg =6;
, 6 X 13 + 5 X 12 22
and J,,.:. jg- =-3.
Denoting the required distance by d, we have
d = Vx^^ + 3/1" = 9.475 in. Ans. ,
4. Seven equal forces are applied at seven of the vertices of a cube.
What is the distance of the point of application of their resultant from
the eighth vertex?
Solution. — Take the eighth vertex as the origin of co-ordinates, and
the three edges passing through it as axes. We shall have, from Equa-
tions (38, 29, 30), denoting one edge of the cube by a,
x^ = ^a, 2/1 = ja, and z^ = ^a.
Denoting the required distance by d, we have
d = Voii* + yi' + Zi* = ^a Vs. Ans.
5. Two isosceles triangles are constructed on opposite sides of the base
6, having altitudes equal to h and h', h being greater than h'. Where is
the centre of gravity of the space within the two triangles?
Solution. — It must lie on the altitude of the greater triangle. Take
the common base as an axis of moments ; then will the moments of the
triangles be ^bh x ^h, and y>h' x ^7i' ; and we have
uih'^-n'^) ,,, ,,,
60 MEOHAKICS.
That is, the centre of gravity is on the altitude of the greater triangle,
at a distance from the base equal to one third of the difference of the
two altitudes.
6. Where is the centre of gravity of the space between two circles
tangent to each other internally?
Solution. — Take their common tangent as an axis of moments. The
centre of gravity will lie on the common normal, and its distance from
the point of contact is given by the equation,
Trr* — vrr" r^ +rr' + r'^
1 n-r* — Trr" r + r' '
7. Let there be a square, divided by its diagonals into four equal parts,
one of which is removed. Required the distance of the centre of gravity
of the remaining figure from the opposite side of the square.
Ans. ^-g of the side of the square.
8. To construct a triangle, having given its base and centre of gravity.
Solution. — Draw through the middle of the base, and the centre of
gravity, a straight line ; lay off beyond the centre of gravity a distance
equal to twice the distance from the middle of the base to the centre of
gravity. The point thus found is the vertex.
9. Three men carry a cylindrical bar, one taking hold of one end, and
the others at a common point. Required the position of this point, in
order that the three may sustain equal portions of the weight.
Ans. At three-fourths the length of the cylinder from the first.
STABILITY A^T> EQUILIBRIUM:.
Stable, TTnstable, and Indifferent Equilibrium.
51. A body is in stable equilibrium when, on being slightly
disturbed from a state of rest, it has a tendency to return to
that state. This will be the case when the centre
of gravity of the body is at its lowest point. Let v\
A he a body suspended from an axis 0, about
which it is free to turn. When the centre of
gravity of A lies vertically below the axis, it is in
equilibrium, for the weight of the body is exactly ^-■
counterbalanced by the resistance of the axis. Kg. 40.
CBNTKE OF GRAVITY AND STABILITY.
61
e-.
5JS
/P
Moreover, the equilibrium is stalle ; for if the body be de-
fleeted to A', its weight acts with the lever arm OP to restore
it to its position of rest, A.
A body is in unstable equilibrium when, on being slightly
disturbed from its state of rest, it tends to depart still farther
from it. This will be the case when the centre of gravity of
the body occupies its highest position.
Let ^ be a sphere, connected by an inflexible rod with the
axis 0. "When the centre of gravity of A is verti-
cally above 0, it is in unstable equilibrium ; for,
if the sphere be deflected to the position A', its
weight will act with the lever arm OP to increase
the deflection. The motion continues till, after
a few vibrations, it comes to rest below the axis.
In this last position, it is in stable equilibrium.
A body is in indifferent, or neutral, equilibrium when it
remains at rest, wherever it may be placed. This is the case
when the centre of gravity continues in the same horizontal
plane on being slightly disturbed.
Let ^ be a sphere, supported by a horizontal axis OP
through its centre of gravity. Then, in whatever position it
may be placed, it will have no tendency to change this posi-
tion ; it is, therefore, in indifferent, or neutral equilibrium.
oy~
Pig. 41.
Kg. 48.
Kg. 43.
In figure 43, A, B, and G, represent a cone in positions of
stable, unstable, and indifferent equilibrium.
If a wheel be mounted on a horizontal axis, about which it
is free to turn, the centre of gravity not lying on the axis, it
62 MECHANICS.
will be in stable equilibrium, when the centre of gravity is
directly below the axis ; and in unstable equilibrium when it
is directly above the axis. When the axis passes through the
centre of gravity, it will, in every position, be in neutral
equilibrium.
"We infer, from the preceding discussion, that when a body
at rest is so situated that it cannot be disturbed from its posi-
tion without raising its centre of gravity, it is in a state of
stable equilibrium; when a slight disturbance depresses the
centre of gravity, it is in a state of unstable equilibrium;
when the centre of gravity remains constantly in the same
horizontal plane, it is in a state of neutral equilibrium.
This principle holds true in the combinations of wheels
and other pieces used in machinery, and indicates the im-
portance of balancing these elements, so that their centres of
gravity may remain in the same horizontal planes.
Stability of Bodies on a Horizontal Plane.
53. A body resting on a horizontal plane may touch it in one,
or in more than one point. In the latter . case, the salient
polygon, formed by joining the extreme points of contact,
as abed, is called the polygon of sup- <.
port. \\\
When the direction of the weight of . — / i \ V-; — 7
the body, that is, the vertical through / //"^< X/ /
its centre of gravity, pierces the plane / ; — - — /
within the polygon of support, the '^'
body is stable, and will remain in equilibrium, unless acted
upon by some other force than the weight of the body. In
this case, the body will be most easily overturned about that
side of the polygon of support which is nearest to the line
of direction of the weight. The moment of the weight, with
respect to this side, is called the moment of stability.
Denoting the weight of the body by W, the distance from
CEKTEE OF GRAVITY AND STABILITY. 63
its line of direction to the nearest side of the polygon of sup-
port by r, and the moment of stability by S, we have,
8= Wr.
The moment of stability is the moment of the least extra-
neous force that is capable of oTerturning the body. The
weight of a body remaining the same, its stability increases
with r. If the polygon of support is a. regular polygon, the
stability will be greatest, other things being equal, when the
direction of the weight passes through its centre. The area
of the polygon of support remaining constant, the stability
will be greater as the polygon approaches a circle.
When the direction of the weight passes without the poly-
gon of support, the body is unstable, and unless supported
by some other force than the weight, it will turn about the
side nearest the direction of the weight. In this case, the
product of the weight into the distance from its direction to
the nearest side of the polygon, is called the moment of in-
stability.
The moment of instability is equal to the least moment of
a force that can prevent the body from overturning.
If. the direction of the weight intersect any side of the
polygon of support, the body will be in a state of equilibrium
bordering on rotation about that side.
In what precedes, we supposed the supporting plane to be
horizontal, and that the only force acting is the weight of
the body.
Stability when One Body Presses on Another.
53. When other forces than the weight are acting on a
body, and when the plane of contact of the two bodies has
any position, the conditions of stability require, first, that
the resultant of all the forces shall pass within the polygon of
64
MECHANICS.
%1
Fig. 45.
support, to prevent rotation; and, secondly, that it shall be
normal to the plane of contact, to prevent sliding.
For example, let A be a movable body pressed against a
fixed body B, and touching it at a single
point, P'. In order that A may be in
equilibrium, the resultant of all the forces
acting on it, including its ■weight, must
pass through the point of contact, P' ;
otherwise there would be a tendency to
rotation about P', which would be meas-
ured by the moment of the resultant
with respect to this point. Furthermore,
the direction of the resultant must be normal to the surface
of B at the point P', else the body A would have a tendency
to slide along the body B, which tendency would be meas-
ured by the tangential component. The pressure on B de-
velops a force of reaction, which is equal and directly opposed
to it.
Practical Problems.
1. A horizontal beam AB, which sustains a load, is supported by a
pivot at A, and by a cord BE, the point E being vertically over A
Required the tension of DE, and the vertical pressure on A.
Solution.— Denote the weight of the beam and load by W, and suppose
its point of application to be G. Denote GA
byp, the perpendicular distance, AF, from
A to DE, by y , and the tension of the cord
by t. If we take ^ as a centre of moments,
we have, in case of equilibrium,
Wp = tp'
t:
wE-
y
Or, denoting the angle EDA by a, and the
distance AD by b, we have,
Fig. 46.
' = J sin o ;
W-,
P
b sina'
CENTEE OF GRAVITY AND STABILITY. 65
To find the vertical pressure on A, resolve t into components, parallel
and perpendicular to AB. We have for the latter component, denoted
t' = tsma= W^
of
The vertical pressure on A, plus the weight W, must be equal to t'.
Denoting the vertical pressure by P, we have,
p + .W=W^; or,P=l^(|.-l)=Tr(^);
P= W^.
When DG=0 ; or, when Z) and C coincide, the vertical pressure is 0.
2. A rope, AD, supports a pole, DO, one end
of which rests on a horizontal plane, and from the 3)
other is suspended a weight W. Required the ^^
tension of the rope, and the thrust, or pressure, on ^^^"^B'ir
the pole, its weight being neglected. ^^ l^'' w
Solution. — Denote the tension of the rope by t, ^ '
the pressure on the pole by p, the angle ADO by a, j,j ._
and the angle ODTT by /3.
There are three forces acting at D, which hold each other in equilib-
rium ; the weight W, acting downward, the tension of the rope, acting
from D, toward A, and the reaction of the pole, acting from toward
D. Lay oflE Dd, to represent the weight, and complete the parallelo-
gram daoD ; then will Da represent the tension of the rope, and Do the
thrust on the pole.
From Eq. 16, we have, '
<: TT:: sin /?: Sinn; .: t = W^^.
sm a
We have, also, from the same principle,
JO : W : : sin (o + /J) : sin n ; .-. p= W -. -.
^ \ I-/ J- sva.a
If the rope is horizontal, we have a = 90° — (3, which gives,
W
i = Wtan/3, and p = -„.
^ cos p
3. A beam I'B, is suspended by ropes attached at its extremities, and
fastened to pins A and //. Required the tensions of the ropes.
66
MECHANICS.
Solution.— Denote the weight oi the beam and its load by W, and
let c be its point of application. Denote the
tension of the rope BS, by t, and that of FA
by i'. The forces in equilibrium, are W, t and
t'. The plane of these forces must be vertical,
and further, the directions of the forces must
intersect in a point. Produce AJF and BH,
till they intersect in K, and draw Kc ; take Kc,
to represent the TV^eight of the beam and its
load, and complete the parallelogram Kbcf ; then wUl Kb represent t,
and Kf wUl represent t'. Denote the angle eKB by a, and cKF by ^.•
We shall hare, as in the last problem.
And,
TT : < : : sin (o + |8) : sin ;8 ;
W : V : : sin (a + /3) : sin a ;
t= Tf
sin /J
sin (a + /3)'
V= W
sin (a + |8)'
4 A gate AS, is supported at on a pivot, and at J. by a hinge,
attached to a post AB. Required the pressure on the pivot, and the
tension of the hinge.
Solution.— Denote the weight of the gate and its load by W, and let
G be its point of application. Produce the vertical through C, tiU it
intersects the horizontal through A in D, and draw
DO. Then wUl AD and DO be the directions of the
required components of W. Lay off Dc, to represent
W, and complete the parallelogram, Dcoa ; then will
Do represent the pressure on 0, and aD the tension
on the hinge, A. Denoting the angle oDc by a, the
pressure on the pivot by ^, and on the hinge by^, we
have,
W
P-
and p' =psina.
If we denote OJEJ by 6, and DE by h, we shall have,
Hence,
h
i^V> +A«
:, and sin o = ■
Vi^+h'
p = T , and p' = — i—
Vjs + h'
CENTRE OF GEAVITY AND STABILITY.
67
B 3
Pig. 50.
5. Having two rafters, AG and BC,
abutting in notches of a tie-beam AB,
it is required to find the pressure, or
thrust, on the rafters, and the direc-
tion and intensity of the pressure on
the joints at the tie-beam.
Solution. — Denote the weight of
the rafters and their load by 3m) ; we
may regard this weight as made up of three parts — a weight w, applied
at C, and two equal weights ^w, applied at A and .B respectively. De-
note the half span AL by s, the rise CL by h, and the length of the
rafter AG oi CB by I. Denote, also, the angle GBL by o, the thrust on
each rafter by t, and the resultant pressure at each of the joints A and
-Bby^.
Lay ofE Go to represent the weight w, and complete the parallelogram
Gboa ; then will Ga and Gh represent the thrust on the rafters ; and,
since Ghoa is a rhombus, we have.
t =
w
2 sin a
wl
'2A'
Conceive t to be applied at A, and there resolve it into components
parallel to GL and LA ; we have, for these components,
I sm a = ^, and r cos a = ■—•
The latter component gives the strain on the tie-beam, AB.
To find the pressure on the joint, we have, acting downward, the
forces ^w and |w, or the single force w, and, acting from L toward A,
the force ^ ; hence.
If we denote the angle DAE by ft we have from the right-angled
triangle DAE,
DE ws s
The joint should be perpendicular to the force p, that is, it should
make with the horizon an angle whose tangent is ^.
68 MECHANICS.
6. In the Jast problem suppose the rafters to abut against the wall.
Required the least thickness that must be given to it to prevent it from
being overturned.
Solution. — Denote the weight thrown on the wall by w, the length of
wall that sustains the pressure p by V, its height by h', its thickness by
X, and the weight of each cubic foot of wall by ««' ; then will the weight
of this part be w'h'l'x.
The force ^ acts with an arm of lever h' to overturn the wall about
its lower and outer edge ; this force is resisted by the weight w+w'h I'x,
acting through the centre of gravity of .the wall with a lever arm equal
to \x. If there be an equilibrium, the moments of these two forces
are equal, that is,
*"« -L, , >i/,i >« i«8h' ,,,„
g^ X K =z(w + w hTx)g, or —=-— = wx + v/h'Vx'.
Reducing, we have, x" + —rm, ^ = -ttttt ;
vih'V v/l'h
7. A sustaining wall has a cross section in the form of a trapezoid, the
face on which the pressure is thrown being vertical, and the opposite
face having a slope of six perpendicular to om
horizontal. Required the least thickness that
must be given to the wall at top, that it may not
be overturned by a horizontal pressure, whose
point of application is at a, distance from the I
bottom of the wall equal to one third its height. /
D EI" G
Pig. 51.
Solution. — Pass a plane through the edge A
parallel to BC, and consider a portion of the
wall whose length is one foot. Denote the pressure on this by P, the
height of the wall by 6A, its thickness at top by x, and the weight of a
cubic foot by w. Let fall from the centres of gravity and 0' of the
two portions, perpendiculars OG and 0'^, and take the edge Z) as an
axis of moments. The weight of the portion ABGF is equal to %whx,
and its lever arm, DO-, is equal to A + \x. The weight of the portion
ADF is Zwh^, and its lever arm, BE, is f A. In case of equilibrium.
CENTEE OF GEATITT AND STABILITY.
69
the sum of the moments of their weights must be equal to the moment
of P, whose lever arm is 2h. Hence,
6whx(h + ^) + Swh' X ih = Px2h;
or, 6whx + 3wx' + 2wh^ = 2P.
Whence,
x' + %hx :
'6w
■ = -7i±\/
a(P - wK^
'6'w
+ h'>.
8. Required the conditions of stability of a square pillar acted on by a
force oblique to the axis, and applied at the centre of gravity of the
upper base.
Solution. — Denote the intensity of the force by P, its inclination to
the vertical by a, the breadth of the pillar by 2a, its height by x, and its
weight by W. Through the centre of gravity of the
pUlar draw a vertical AO, and lay off ^C equal to W ;
prolong PA and lay off AS equal to P ; complete the
parallelogram ABDC, and prolong the diagonal till it
intersects EG- at F. If F is between H and Cr the
pillar will be stable ; if at ^, it will be indiif erent ; if
beyond H, it will be unstable. To find an expression
for FCf, draw BE perpendicular to A(jf. From the
similar triangles ADF and AFG, we have,
BE-.FG; - ^"^^^
^
//
i/ /
■//a
AE-.AG
F& = --
AE
SS. G
Hs. 52.
But AO = X, DE — Psin a, and AE = TT + Pcos a, fcence, we have.
FG:
Px sin a
W + Fcosa'
And, since SG equals a, we have the following conditions for sta-
bility, indifference, and instability, respectively :
Pc sin a
a >
a <
W + Pcosa
Px sin a
W+ Pcosa'
Px sin a
W+ Poos a
IV.— ELEMENTAEY MACHINES.
Definitions and General Principles.
54. A machme is a contrivance by means of which a
force applied at one point is made to produce an efEect at
some other point.
The applied force is called the power, and the force to be
overcome the resistance ; the source of the power is called
the motor.
Some of the more common motors are muscular effort, as
exhibited by man and beast in various kinds of work ; the
weight and kinetic energy of water, as shown in various kinds
of water-mills ; the expansive force of vapors and gases, as
displayed in steam and caloric engines ; the force of air in
motion, as exhibited in the windmill, and in the propulsion of
sailing vessels ; the force of magnetic attraction and repul-
sion, as shown in the magnetic telegraph and other magnetic
machines ; the elastic force of springs, as shown in watches
and various ^ther machines. Of these the most important
are steam and water power.
Applied and ITseful Work.— Modulus.
55. Machines simply transmit and modify the action of
forces. They add nothing to the work of the motor ; on the
contrary, they absorb and render inefficient much of the
force which is impressed on them.
Of the applied work, a part is expended in overcoming
friction, stiffness of cords, bands or chains, resistance of the
air, and adhesion of the parts. This goes ta wear out the
machine. A second portion is expended in overcoming
ELEMEHTAKT MACHIKES. 71
shocks, arising from the nature of the work to be accom-
plished, as well as from imperfect connection of the parts,
and from want of hardness and elasticity in the connecting
pieces. This also goes to strain and wear out the machine,
and to increase the waste already mentioned.
In any machine the quotient obtained by dividing the
quantity of useful, or effective work, by the quantity of ap-
plied work, is called the modulus of the machine. As the
resistances are diminished, the modulus increases, and the
machine becomes more perfect.
Trains of Mechanism.
56. A machine usually consists of an assemblage of mov-
ing pieces called elements, kept in position by a con-
nected system called a fram.e. Of the moving pieces,
that which receives the power is called the recipient or
prime mover, that which performs the work, is called the
operator or tool, and the connecting pieces constitute
what is called a train of mechanism. Of two consecu-
tive elements, that which imparts motion is called a driver,
and that which receives motion is called a follo"wer. Each
piece, except the extremes, is a follower, with respect to
that which precedes, and a driver, with respect to that which
follows.
In studying a train of mechanism we first find the relation
between the power and resistance for each element neglecting
hurtful resistances. We then modify these results so as to
take account of all resistances, such as friction, adhesion,
stiffness of cords, and atmospheric resistance. Having found
the relation between the power and resistance for each piece,
we begin at one extreme and combine them, recollecting, that
the resistance with respect to each driver is equal to the power
with respect to its follower.
We might also find the modulus of each element, and take
73 MECHANICS.
the product of these partial moduli as the modulus of the
entire machine.
The Mechanical Powers.
57. The elements to which all machines can be reduced,
are sometimes called mechanical povrers. They are seven
in number — viz., the cord, the lever, the inclined plane,
the pulley, the wheel and axle, the screw, and the
wedge. The first three are simple elements ; the pulley,
and the wheel and axle, are combinations of the cord and
lever ; the screw is a combination of two inclined planes
twisted round an axle ; and the wedge is a simple combina-
tion of two inclined planes.
In finding the relation between the power and resistance
we shall, in the first instance, not only neglect all hurtful
resistances, but we shall also suppose cords, levers, and con-
necting links, to be destitute of weight.
The Cord.
58. Let AB be a cord solicited by two forces, P and E,
applied at its extremities, A and B. In order that the cord
may be in equilibrium, it is evident,
in the first place, that the forces ^^ J J ^^
must act in the direction of the Mg. 63.
cord, and in such manner as to
stretch it, otherwise the cord would bend ; and in the second
place, the forces must be equal, otherwise the greater would
prevail, and motion would ensue. Hence, if two forces ap-
plied at the extremities of a cord are in equilibrium, tJie
forces are equal and directly opposed.
Let ABhe a cord solicited by groups of forces applied at
its extremities. In order that these forces
may be in equilibrium, the resultants of
the groups at A and B must be equal and
directly opposed. -mg. m.
ELEMEKTARY MACHINES. 73
Let ABCBhea. cord, at the points A, B, C, D, of which
groups of forces are applied. If these forces are in equilib-
rium through the intervention
of the cord, there must neces-
sarily be an equilibrium at
each point, and this, whatever
may be the lengths of AB,BO,
and CD. If we make these " Pig. is.
infinitely small, the equilib-
rium will still subsist. But in that case the points A, B, C,
and B, will coincide, 'and all the forces will be applied at a
single point. Hence, we conclude, that a system, of forces
applied in any manner at points of a cord will he in
equilihrium, when, if applied at a single point without
change of intensity or direction, they will maintain
each other in equilibrium.
Prom what precedes, we see that the function of a cord in
mechanism is simply to transmit forces, without modifying
them in any manner.
The tension of a cord is the force by which two of its ad-
jacent parts are urged to separate. If a cord be solicited in
opposite directions by equal forces, its tension is measured by
either force. If the forces are unequal, the tension is meas-
ured by the less.
The Lever.
59. A lever is an inflexible bar, free to turn around an
axis, called the falcnim.
Levers are sometimes divided into three classes, according
to the relative positions of the power, resistance, and fulcrum.
In the first class the fulcrum is between the power and
resistance, as in the ordinary balance ; in the second class
the resistance is between the power and the fulcrum, as in
the ordinary nut cracker ; in the third class the power is
74
MECHANICS.
[45
between the resistance and tlie fulcrum. Strictly speaking,
the last two are only varieties of a single class.
1st Class. an Ci-asb, 3d Class.
y
Fig. 56.
Fig. m.
v!
Fig. B8.
Levers may be curved, or straight ; and the power and re-
sistance may be either parallel or oblique to each other. We
shall suppose the power and resistance to be perpendicular to
the fulcrum ; otherwise we might conceive each to be resolved
into two components, one perpendicular, and the other par-
allel, to this axis. The latter would tend to make the lever
slide along the axis, developing hurtful resistance, while the
former alone would tend to turn the lever about the fulcrum.
The perpendicular distances from the fulcrum to the lines
of direction of the power and resistance, are called lever
arms. In the bent lever MFN^ the perpendicular distances
FA, and FB, are the lever arms of P and R.
To determine the conditions of
equilibrium of the lever, denote the a J^
power by P, the resistance by R, and
their lever arms by p and r. We
have the case of a body restrained by
an axis, and if we take this as the
axis of moments, we shall have for
the condition of equilibrium (Art. 31),
Pp = Rr; or, P : R : : r : p
That is, the power is to the resistance, as the lever arm
of the resistance, ig to th& hver c^rtv, q/ the power.
Fig. 59.
(45)
46.] ELEMENTAKT MACHIKES. 75
This relation holds good for every kind of lever.
If P and B intersect, their resultant will pass through the
point of intersection, and also through F ; its value may be
found by the parallelogram of forces.'
If several forces act upon a lever at different points, all
being perpendicular to the direction of the fulcrum, they will
be in equilibrium, when the algebraic sum of their moments,
with respect to the fulcrum, is equal to 0. This principle
enables us to take into account the weight of the lever, which
is to be regarded as a vertical force through the centre of
gravity of the lever.
MBCHAifiCAL Advantage. — In. any machine the quotient
of the resistance by the power is called the mechanical ad-
vantage. Thus, in the case above considered, we have, for
the mechanical advantage,
|=f («)
When By- F there is said to be a gaiti of mechanical advan-
tage, and when R <_ F there is a loss. Because there is an
equilibrium between B and P, their elementary quantities of
work must be equal, from the theorem of work (Eq. 35) ;
hence, if By- F, we have, 6r < Sp, and if i? < P, we have,
dr > 6p. These principles apply to every case in which
there is an equilibrium between the power and resistance.
Friction.
60. Friction is the resistance that one body experiences
in moving on another when the two bodies are pressed to-
gether by a force that is normal to both.
This resistance arises from inequalities in the surfaces of
the bodies, the projections of the one falling into the depres-
sions of the other. To overcome the resistance, a sufficient
force must be applied either to break off or bend down the
76 MECHAKICS.
projecting points, or else to drag the body over them ; this
force must be equal and directly opposed to for,ce of friction,
which acts tangentially to the two surfaces.
Between certain bodies, friction is somewhat different when
motion is just beginning, from what it is when motion has
been established. The friction developed when a body is
passing from a state of rest to a state of motion, is called
friction of quiescence ; that between bodies in motion, is
called friction of motion.
The following laws of firiction have been established by
experiment, viz. :
First, friction of quiescence between the same bodies
is proportional to the normal pressure, and independent
of the extent of the surfaces in contact.
Secondly, friction of motion between the same bodies,
is proportional to the normal pressure, and independent,
both of the extent of surface of contact, and of the ve-
locity of the moving body.
Thirdly, for compressJhle bodies, friction of quiescence
is greater than friction of motion: for bodies which are
incompressJMe, the difference is scarcely appreciable.
Friction may be diminished by the interposition of un-
guents, which fill up the cavities, and so diminish the rough-
ness of the rubbing surfaces. For slow motions and great
pressures, the more substantial unguents are used, such as
lard, tallow, and certain mixtures ; for rapid motions, and
light pressures, oils are generally employed.
Methods of finding the Coefficient of Friction.
61. The quotient obtained by dividing the force of friction
by the normal pressure, is called the coefficient of friction ;
its value for any two substances, may be determined as
follows :
4T.] ELBMENTAET MACHINES. 77
Let AB be a horizontal plane formed of one of the sub-
stances, and a cubical block of the other. Attach a string,
OC, to the block, so that its di-
rection shall pass through the
centre of gravity, and be parallel Ar—
to AB ; let the string pass over a
Si
■^c>
fixed pulley, C, and let a weight, p
F, be attached to its extremity. DP
Increase F till just begins to
slide along the plane, then will F be the force of friction.
Denote the normal pressure by P, and the coefficient of fric-
tion by/. From the definition, we have,
/=! (47)
In this manner, values for / may be found for different
substances, and arranged in tables.
The value of /, for any substance, is its coefficient of fric-
tion. Hence, we may define the coefficient of friction to be
the friction due to a normal pressure of one pound.
Having the normal pressure in pounds, and the coefficient
of friction, the entire fription may be found by multiplying
these quantities together. *
There is a second method of finding the value of /, as.
follows :
Let AB be an inclined plane, formed of one of the sub-
stances, and a block, of the other. Elevate the plane till
the block just begins to slide 'down
by its own weight. Denote the incli-
nation, at this instant, by a, and the
weight of 0, by W. Eesolve W into
two components, one normal to the
plane, and the other parallel to it. Fig.ei.
Denote the former by P, and the latter
78 MECHAKICS. [*8.
by Q. Since OF" is perpendiculai' to AG, and OP to AB,
the angle, WOF, is equal to a. Hencej
P = Wcoa a, and Q = IF sin a.
The normal pressure being equal to TFcos a, and the force
of friction being Wsm a, we shall have, from the principle
already explained,
, TTsina . ^
f = -^^ , or, f = tan ec (48)
' PT cos fit' ' ■' ^ '
The angle es is called the angle of Motion, The yalues
of /for a few of the more common cases are given in the fol-
lowing
TABLE.
Bodies between whU^flietUm takes place. Co^gident dffiic&oa.
Iron on oak 63
Cast-iron on oak 49
Oak on oak, fibres parallel 48
Do., do., greased 10
Cast-iron on oast-iron 15
Wrought-iron on wronght-iron 14
Brass on iron .* 16
Brass on brass ' ^
Wrought-iron on cast-iron 19
Cast-iron on ebn 19
Soft limestone on the same 64
Hard limestone on the same 38
EcLnilibrium Bordering on Motion.
63. Let ^ be a movable body, resting on a fixed body
B ; let P be the resultant of all the forces acting on A, when
it is on the eve of sliding along B in the direction from D
to C, and let E, equal and directly opposed to P, be the
corresponding reaction ; that there may be no tendency to
4»-] ELEMENTAET MACHIlSrES. » 79
rotation, the direction of P must in-
tersect the surface, DC, at some
point within the polygon of support.
At A, the point of application of
P, draw AN, normal to DC.
If ow, let P be resolved into two
components, one in the direction of
the normal, and the other in the di-
rection of the tangent DO; if we denote the angle between
P and the normal by 0, the former will be equal to P cos 0,
and the latter to P sin 0.
The normal component of P multiplied by / will be the
measure of the entire friction between A and B, which is
directed from G towards D ; the tangential component of P
exactly balances the force of friction and is directed from D
towards C; hence, we have
Pcos X / = P sin 0, or / = tan 0, or = tan -y . . . (49)
That is, when a body is on the eve of sliding along
a second body, the reaction of the second body lies on
the side of the normal opposite to the direction of in-
cipient motion and makes an angle with it equal to
the angle of friction.
Method of Finding the Modnlns.
63. The modulus of a machine is the quotient of the ele-
mentary quantity of work of the resistance by the elementary
quantity of work of the power. Assuming the same notation
as before and denoting the modulus by M, we have
,, RSr R dr ,_..
^=P6-p-p''6-p (^^)
When friction is considered, P will be a function of/, that
is, it will depend upon / for its value ; let this value of P be
80
MECHANICS.
[61.
denoted by Pj \ it is obyious that the yalues of R, 6r, and (Jp
will be entirely independent of /. When friction is not con-
sidered, P is obviously what Pj becomes when/ = ; denote
this value of P by P^ When P^ and 11 are in equilibrium,
we have
P„(5p = R8r, or -T- =
6r
6p
R'
Substituting in (50), we have
R
^=%xt
(51)
Hence, we have the following rule for finding the modulus
of a machine when friction is taken into account :
Find the value of P in terms of R and f; in this
result make f equal to 0; then divide the latter re-
sult by the former.
To Find the Modulus of a Lever.
64. Let AB represent a lever and suppose its fulcrum to
be a solid cylinder turning in a cylindrical box ; also, suppose
both lever and fulcrum to be
horizontal. Denote the power
by P, the resistance by R, the
weight of the lever by W, and
let the distances of these forces
from the centre of the ful-
crum be p, r, and w. If P,
R, and W are vertical the re-
sultant reaction OQ will pass
through the point of contact
and will be directed vertically upward.
When P is on the eve of overcoming all the resistances,
it will be equal to P, of the preceding article, the fulcrum
Fig. 68.
62.] ELEMESTTAKT MACHINES. 81
will be on the eve of sliding in the direction OT, and the
normal ON, which passes through the axis of the fulcrum,
must be so situated as to make the angle NOQ, denoted by
^, equal to the angle of friction (Art. 63).
Take as a centre of moments and denote the radius of
the fulcrum by p ; the corresponding lever arm of P, will be
p — psm (p, that of R will he r + p sin , and that of W will
he w — p siiKJ) ; and because the forces are in equilibrium, we
shall have, from Art. 31,
P/{p — p sin (j>) -{-W{w — p sin 0) = R{r + p sin (ft),
from which equation we find,
p = ^ (^ + psin^) — W (w — psini^) .
' p — p sin • • • • \ )
Making/ = 0, which makes sin =i 0, we have
Po = ^^ (,3)
Substituting the values of Pq a-iid Pf in equation 51, we haye
TLr Br—Ww p~psm ....
p Ii(r + psuirp) — W(w — psuKp)
f
Note. — ^We have sin * = — from Trigonometry.
Vl+/»
Example.— Let i2 = 100 IBs., 1^= 5 lbs., r = 30 in., p = BO in., w
= 15 in., p = 3 in., and sin = 3 (/ = .314 nearly): What is the modu-
lus? Ans. ,96 nearly, that is, about 96% of the applied work becomes
effective.
Note. — In many cases the value of P/ may be determined by experi-
ment and the value of Po may be found from the equation of equilibrium
when friction is neglected.
83 MECHANICS. [55.
The Componnd Lever.
65. A compound lever is a combination of simple levers
AB, BG, CD, so arranged that the resistance in one acts as a
power in the next, through-
out the combination. Thus, a
power P produces at 5 a re-
sistance R', which, in turn, ■*- "R ' * !,"
P I i^! P^
B," 1
produces at C a resistance R",
and so on. Let us assume the
notation of the figure. From
the principle of the simple ^'fr ^^
lever, we have the relations,
Pp = R'r", R'p' = R"r', R"p" = Rr.
Multiplying these equations, member by member, and
striking out common factors, we have
Ppp'p" = Rrr'r" ; or, P : R :: rr'r" : pp'p" (55)
And similarly for any number of levers.
Hence, in the compound lever, the power is to the resist-
ance as the continued product of the alternate arms
of lever, commencing at the resistance, is to the con-
tinued product of the alternate arms of lever, com-
mencing at the power.
Modulus. — If p, pf, p', are each equal to 10 ; if r, r, r'' are each equal
to 2 ; and if R equals 100 lbs., we have Po = Sib. If we find by experi-
ment that a force of 1 lb. applied at A will' just overcome a resistance of
100 lbs. applied at D, we have P/ = 1 Z6. Then, to find the modulus,
substitute these in (51), and we have
M=~ = SQ% (56)
that is, 80% of the applied force becomes effective.
ST.]
ELEMBNTAKY MACHIKES.
83
Fig. 65.
The Elbow-Joint Press.
66. Let BD and BO represent equal bars, taving hinge-
points at B, 0, and D, and let
BE be a bar that works back
and forth through a guide be-
tween E and B\ Let P be the
power applied at B, and per-
pendicular to DO. When P
acts to depress B, the link BO
turns about O, and the force
transmitted through the link BB causes the piece BE to
move towards F, so as to compress a body placed between
E and F. This machine is called the elbow-joint press,
and is used in some kinds of printing, in moulding bullets, in
stamping coins, in crushing stone, and in many other like
kinds of work.
To find the mechanical advantage, let us resolve P into
two components in the direction of the links 5 C and ^Z*;
these components are equal, and if we denote one of them by
Q, and the angle, DBO, by ;3, we have, from (14),
whence
A/a(l + cosi9f)r
If we denote the angle QBB by <*, the effective component
of § is ^ cos a, and this is equa?! amd directly opposed to the
resistance R ; hence,
R _ cos «_
P
(57)
^2(1 -f-cos/J)
As B approaches the line BO, cos « approaches 1, and cos fi
approaches — 1 ; at the limit cos « = 1, and cos = — 1,
84 MECHANICa.
•
and the mechamc^l advantage becomes infinite. It is to be
noted that the elementary space through which the pressure
is exerted varies inversely as the mechanical advantage ;
hence, at the limit it is 0.
To find the modulus of the reciprdcating piece DE : as-
sume the figure in
■e;
y
which AB represents
the part within the
guide, being its cen-
tre. In addition to
the notation already
adopted, let the length
of J ^ be denoted by 21, its breadth by 2b, and the distance,
OD, by d.
The tendency of Q is to produce rotation, pressing the
piece downward at A, and upward at JB ; when Q is on the
eve of overcoming E, there will be a reaction S at A, and a
reaction S' at £, each of which, from Art. 63, will lie on that
side of the corresponding normal which is opposite to the
direction of incipient motion> and in each case the inclina-
tion to the normal will be equal to , the angle of friction.
At the instant in question there will be an equilibrium be-
tween Q, S, 8', and B ; consequently, the algebraic sum of
their components in the direction of OD, and in the direction
perpendicular to OD, will be separately equal to 0, and also
the algebraic sum of their moments with respect to will be
equal to 0. Hence, we have,
QooBa = B + {S + S')sm (b)
Qsmaxd—{S+S')cos cos(t>
Making = /, factoring, and clearing, we have,
Q {fd sin a — hf^ sin a — I cos a) + Bl = 0.
Solving with respect to Q, -whiph is the same as Q^, we have,
^'~ Zees a — /c^sina+ 5/*sina '
Making/ = 0, we have,
Q _ ^^ _ _^ lf\
I cos a cos a ^"^ '
Hence, from Bq. (51), after reduction, we have,
,, I — fd tan a + ip tan «s ,.„.
M=z y- y-^ — '!- (o8)
Hence, the modulus varies with a, as was to have been ex-
pected ; at the limit, Jf = 1.
Weighing Machines.
6?. Nearly all weighing machines depend on the princi-
ple of the lever ; the resistance is the weight to he determined,
and the power is a counterpoising weight of known value.
There are two principal classes of weighing machines : in
tlie first, the lever arm of the power is constant, and the
power varies ; in the second, the power is constant, and its
lever arm varies. The ordinary balance is an example of the
first class, and the steelyard of the second.
The Common Balance.
68. The common 'balance consists of a lever, AB, called
86 MECHANICS.
the beam, having a knife-edge fulcrum, F, and two scale-
pans, D and E, suspended from its
extremities by means of knife-edge
joints at A and B. The beam is sup-
ported by a standard, FK, resting on
a foot-plate, L. The standard is made
vertical by leveling screws passing
through the foot-plate. The knife-
edges and their supports are of hard- j^ ^
ened steel; and to prevent unnecessary
wear, an arrangement is made for throwing them from their
bearings when not in use. A needle, N, playing in front of
a graduated scale, QH, shows the amount of deflection of the
beam.
A good balance should fulfill the following conditions : 1°,
it should be true ; 2°, it should be stable — that is, when
the beam is deflected it should tend to return to a horizontal
position ; 3°, it should be sensitive — ^that is, it should be
deflected from the horizontal by a small force.
In order that a balance may be true, its lever arms must be
equal in length, and when the beam is horizontal, both the
beam and scale-pans must be symmietrical with respect to two
planes through the centre of gravity of the beam, the first
plane being perpendicular to the beam, and the second per-
pendicular to the fulcrum.
In order that it may be stable, the centre of gravity of the
beam must be below the fulcrum, and the line joining the
points of suspension of the scale-pans must not pass' above the
fulcrum.
In order that it may be sensitive, the line joining the points
of suspension must not pass below the fulcrum, the lever
arms must be as long, and the beam as light as is consistent
with strength andstiffness, the knife-edges must be horizon-
tal and parallel to each other, and the friction at the joints
59] ELEMENTAET MACHINES. 87
must be as small as possible. The sensitiveness of a balance
diminishes as the load increases.
The true weight of a body may be found by a balance
whose lever arms are not equal, by means of the principle
demonstrated below.
Denote the length of the lever arms, by r and r, and the
weight of the body, by W. When the weight W is applied
at the extremity of the arm r, denote the counterpoising
weight by W ; and when it is at the extremity of the arm
r', denote the counterpoising weight by W". We shall
have, from the principle of the lever,
Wr = W'r', and Wr' — W"r.
Multiplying these equations, member by member, we have,
W^rr'=W"W'rr'; .-. W^VWHT'; (59)
that is, the tru>e weight is equal to the square root of the
product of the apparent weights.
A still better method, and one that is more free from the
effect of errors in construction, is to place the body to be
weighed in one scale, and put weights in the other, till the
beam is horizontal ; then remove the body to be weighed, and
replace it by known weights, till the beam is again horizontal ;
the sum of the replacing, weights will be the weight required.
If, in changing the load, the positions of the knife-edges be
not changed, this method is almost perfect.
The Steelyard.
69. The steelyard is an instrument for weighing bodies.
It consists of a lever, AB, called the beam ; a fulcrum, F;
a gcale-pan, D, attached at the extremity of one arm ; and a
known weight, U, movable along the other arm. We shall
suppose the'Hreight of ^ to be 1 lb. This instrument is some-
times more convenient than the balanoB, but it is not so accu-
88 MECHANICS.
rate. The conditions of sensitiveness are essentially the same
as for the balance.
To graduate the instrument, place a pound weight in the
pan, D, and move the counter-
poise E till the beam rests
horizontal — let that point be
marked 1 ; next place a 10 lb. -At|^CIIg Pfii iii M i .' i Mi i iii;,'Tr|PTrwT| iB
weight in the pan, and move ' \ ^
the counterpoise -£' till the beam
is again horizontal, and let that ■" fi 68
point be marked 10; divide
the intermediate space into nine equal parts, and mark the
points of division as shown in the figure. These spaces may
be subdivided at pleasure, and the scale extended to any de-
sirable limit. We have supposed the centre of gravity to
coincide with the fulcrum ; when this is not the case, the
weight of the instrument must be taken into account as a
force applied at its centre of gravity. We may then graduate
the beam by experiment, or we may compute the lever arms,
corresponding to difEereilt weights, by the principle of
moments.
To weigh a body with the steelyard, place it in the scale-
pan, and move the counterpoise E along the beam till an
equilibrium is established ; the mark on the beam will indi-
cate the weight.
The Compound Balance.
70. Compound balances are used in weighing heavy
articles, as merchandise, coal, freight for shipping, and the
like. A great variety of combinations have been employed,
one of which is shown in the figure.
ABi&a, platform on which is placed the object to be weighed;
BO is a guard firmly attached to the platform ; the platform
ELEMEKTAEY MACHINES.
89
Fig. 69.
is supported on the knife-
edge fulcrum E, and the
piece B, through the me-
dium of a brace CD ; OF
is a lever turning about the
fulcrum F, and suspended
by a link from the point L ;
LN\& a lever having its ful-
crum at M, and sustaining
the piece Z> by a link EH ; is a scale-pan suspended from
the end iV^of the lever LN. The instrument is so constructed,
that
EF: OF-.-.KM-.LM;
and we shall suppose that KM is made equal to -^^ of MN.
The parts are so arranged that the beam LN shall rest hori-
zontally when no weight is placed on the platform.
If, now, a body Q be placed on the platform, a part of its
weight will be thrown on the piece D, and, acting downward,
will produce an equal pressure at K. The remaining part
will be thrown on E, and, acting on the lever FO, will pro-
duce a downward pressure at G, which will be transmitted to
L ; but, on account of the relation given by the above -pro-
portion, the effect of this pressure on the lever LN will be
the same as though" the pressure thrown on E had been ap-
plied directly at K. The final effect is, therefore, the same
as though the weight of Q had been applied at K, and, to
counterbalance it, a weight equal to ^ of Q must be placed
in the scale-pan Q.
To weigh a body, place it on the platform, and add weights
to the scale-pan till LNis horizontal, then 10 times the sum
of the weights added will be the weight required. By ap-
plying the principle of the steelyard to this balance, objects
may be weighed by using a constant counterpoise.
90 MECHANICS.
Examples.
1. In a lever of the first class, the lever arm of the resistance Is 2f
inches, that of the power, 33J, and the resistance 100 lbs. What power
is necessary to, hold the resistance in equilibrium ? Ans. 8 lbs.
3. Four weights of 1, 3, 5, and 7 lbs., are suspended from points of a
straight lever, eight inches apart. How far from the point of application
of the first weight must the fulcrum be situated, that the weights may
be in equilibrium ?
Solution. — ^Let x denote the required distance. Then, from Art. (31),
l>«a; + 3(a;-8) + 5(a;-16) + 7(!B-34) = 0;
.•. X = 11 in. Ana.
3. A lever, of uniform thickness, and 13 feet long, is kept horizontal
by a weight of 100 lbs. applied at one extremity, and a force P applied
at the other extremity, so as to make an angle of 30° with the horizon.
The fulcrum is 20 inches from the point of application of the weight,
and the weight of the lever is 10 lbs. What is the value of P, and what
is the pressure on the fulcrum ?
Solution. — The lever arm of P is- equal to 134 in. x sin 30° = 63 in.,
and the lever arm of the weight of the lever is 53 in. Hence,
30 X 100 = 10 X 53 + Px 63 . .-. P = 34 lbs. nearly.
We have, also,
R = ^X' + y= = -v/aiO + 24 sin 30°)» + (24 cos SOy.
and.
4. A heavy lever rests on a fulcrum 2 feet from one end, 8 feet from
the other, and is kept horizontal by a weight of 100 lbs., applied at the
first end, and a weight of 18 lbs., applied at the other end. What is the
weight of the lever, supposed of uniform thickness throughout ? ■
Solution. — Denote the required weight by x ; its arm of lever is 3 ft.
We have, f rorq the principle of the lever,
100 X 2 = a; X 3 + 18 X 8 ; .-. x — 18% lbs. Ans.
R
= 133.8 lbs. ;
X
30.785
B
123.8 - •^^'
a ■■
= 80° 30' 03".
ELBMENTAKT MACHINES. 91
5. Two weights keep a IioTizontal lever at rest ; the pressure on the
fulcrum is 10 lbs., the difEerence of the weights is 4 lbs., and the differ-
ence of lever arms is 9 inches. What are the weights, and their lever
arms ?
Ans. The weights are 7 lbs. and 3 lbs. ; their lever arms are 15f in.,
and 6| in.
6. The apparent weight of a body weighed in one pan of a false bal-
ance is 5 J lbs., and in the other pan it is 6^ lbs. What is the true
weight ?
W = ^/^xii = 6 lbs. Ans.
The Incliued Plane.
71. An inclined plane is a plane that is inclined to the
horizon.
In this machine the resistance is the weight of a body act-
ing vertically downward, and the power is a force applied to
the body, either to prevent motion down the plane, or to pro-
duce motion up the pliane. The power may be applied in
any direction, but we shall suppose it to be in the vertical
plane that is perpendicular to the inclined plane.
To find the mechanical advantage when friction is not con-
sidered. Let BA be the plane, a
body resting on it whose weight is
denoted by B, and let P be the force
necessary to hold it in equilibrium.
The resultant of P and B, denoted
by Q, must pass through the polygon
of support and be perpendicular to
AB (Art. 53). If we denote the
angle between P and B by P, and the angle between Q and
B, which is equal to the inclination of the plane, by ee, the
angle between P and Q will be equal to /? — «, and from
equation (15) we shall have
P : B :: sin «: sin ((3 — «),
92
MECHANICS.
[60.
or.
R _ sin ()3 — a)
P sin «
(GO)
If the power is, parallel to the plane
jS — a, or 0, will be equal to 90°, or sin
(/3 — a) will be equal to 1, and be-
CB
cause sin a = — - equation (60) be-
comes
Pig. 71.
R
P
AB
GB'
■ ■ (61)
That is, the power is to the resistance as the height of
the -plane is to its length.
If the power is parallel to the base
of the plane, that is, to the horizon,
P — a will be equal to 90° — a, and
AC
because cot a = -^-5 equation (60)
will become
R
P
AG
GB
Kg. 18.
(62)
That is, the power is to the resistance as the height of
the plane is to its base.
If a increase, the value of P will increase, and when a be-
comes 90°, P becomes infinite; that is, no finite horizontal
force can sustain a body against a vertical wall, without the
aid of friction.
ExASfPLES.
1. A power of 1 lb., acting parallel to an inclined plane, supports a
weight of 3 lbs. What is the inclination of the plane? Ans. 30°.
3. The power, resistance, and normal pressure, in the case of an
inclined plane, are, respectively, 9, 13, and 6 lbs. What is the inclina-
tion of the plane, and what angle does the power make with the plane?
Ans. Inclination of power to plane — <^ — 90° — a — 38° 46' 54".
63.] BLEMEJS-TARY MACHINES. 93
Solution. — If we denote the angle between the power and resistance
by ^, and the inclination of the plane by a, we have, from Eq. (12),
6 = VW + 9' + 2 X 9 X 13 cos 0;
.•.^ = 156° 8' 20".
Also, from Bq. 12, for the inclination of the plane,
6:9:: sin 156° 8' 20" : sin o ; .-. a = 37° 21' 26".
3. A body is supported on an inclined plane by a force of 10 lbs., act-
ing parallel to the plane; but it requires a force of 12 lbs. to support it
when the force acts parallel to the base. What is the weight of the
body, and the inclination of the plane?
Am. The weight is 18.09 lbs., and the inclination 33° 33' 25".
Modulus of the Inclined Plane.
73. If a block is placed upon the inclined j)lane AB
■whose inclination, a, is greater than
the angle of friction, it will slide down
unless supported by some force; if
the inclination of the plane is less
than to the angle of friction it will
have no tendency to move either up
or down the plane unless acted upon Fig" 73
by some other force than its weight.
To find the modulus when friction is considered : let us
suppose the body to be on the eve of motion up the plane
under the action of the force F, which makes an angle with
the normal, Olf, equal to P. The reaction, Q, due to the
action of P and R will, from Art. 62, be directed as shown
in the figure, being equal to the angle of friction.
Because there is an equilibrium between P, R, and Q, we
shall have, from Eq. (16),
P : R:: sm [180° — (0 + «)] : sin (0 + /?);
or, P : R :: &m(p cos a + sin ec cos , remem-
bering that P is now equal to Pf, and replacing tan by /,
we have
_ „ /coi« + sin« .
^'-^/cos/J + sin/J ^*'*^
Making/ = 0, we have
P. = R'^. (65)
sm jS ^ '
Substituting in (51), we have for the modulus,
^ _ sin 06 /cos/3 + sinj3 _ / cot /? + 1
" sin |3 /cos a + sin a ~/ cot a + 1 '
(66)
The line of least traction is the line along which Pf is
the least possible; in this case the denominator of the value
of Pf must be a maximum: assuming
M = / cos |8 + sin /3
and differentiating with respect to ji, we have
^ = — / sin /3 + cos ;3 = 0; . ■. /3 = cot-y.
Differentiating again
Hence, m is a maximum, and consequently P, is a mini-
mum, when the complement of j8 is equal to the angle of fric-
tion, that is, when the direction of Pf makes an angle with
plane equal to the angle of friction.
Let the student find the modulus when Pf is on the eve of
moving the body down the plane.
Work when the Traction is Parallel to the Plane.
TS. If we make /3 = 90° in Eq. 64, the force of traction
67-] ELBMENTART MACHINES. 95
P, will be parallel to the plane and will be directed from A
towards B. In this case, we haye
P, = Rf cos a + iZ sin a.
Multiplying both members by AB, and replacing ABco's.a
by A G, and ^5 sin a by GB, it becomes
P,y.AB = RfxAG+RxGB. . . . (67)
The first member is the work of the force of traetion in
drawing the body from A to B ; the first term of the second
member is the work that would be required to draw the body
horizontally from A to G; and the second term is the work
that would be required to lift the body vertically from G to
P. Formula (67) finds an application in computing the
work of a locomotive in drawing a train up an inclined plane.
The Pulley.
74. A ptilley is a wheel having a groove around its cir-
cumference to receive a cord ; the wheel turns on an axis at
right angles to its plane, and this axis is supported by a frame
called a block. The pulley is said to he fixed, when the block
is fixed, and movable, when the block is movable. Pulleys
are used singly, or in combinations.
Single Fixed Pulley.
75. In this machine the block is fixed. Denote the power
by P, the resistance by R, and the radius of the
pulley by r. It is plain that both the power and
resistance should be at right angles to the axis.
Hence, if we take the axis of the pulley as an
axis of moments, we have (Art. 31), in case of
equilibrium,
Pr = Rr; or, P = R . . . . (68)
96
MECHANICS.
[69.
Stiffness of Cordage.
•JG. Let be a pulley, with a cord, AB, wrapped round
its circumference ; and suppose a force, P, applied at B, to
overcome a resistance, R. As the rope winds
on the pulley, its rigidity acts to increase the
arm of lever of R, and to overcome this
rigidity an additional force is required. This
additional force may be represented by the
expression,
+ IR\
i^^;
Kg. 75.
in which d depends on the character and size of the rope, a on
its natural rigidity, bR on the rigidity due to the load, and
D is the diameter of the wheel. The values of d, a, and b
have been found by experiment for different kinds of rope,
and tabulated.
The moment of the resistance is found by multiplying the
preceding expression by its lever arm, -J-Z), or r ; denoting this
moment by S, it may be written.
S = m + nR
(69)
Modulus of the Single Fi:sed Pulley.
1"7. Let the solid axle of the pulley turn in a cylindrical
box as shown in the figure ; also,
suppose the axis to be horizontal.
Let the power, P, supposed verti-
cal, be applied at one extremity of
a cord passing over the pulley
AB, and the resistance R at the
other extremity; denote the radius
of the axle by p, the radius of the
pulley by r, and the weight of the Kg. 75*.
70.] ELEMENTAET MACHIKES. 97
pulley and cord (supposed to pass through the centre of the
pulley) by W.
When P acts to turn the pulley the axle rolls up in its box
until it reaches a point 0, beyond which, if it be further dis-
placed, it 117111 slide back. At this point, when F is on the
eve of overcoming the resistances, the reaction, Q, will be
vertical and will make with the normal at an angle equal
to , the angle of friction, and we shall have, as in Art. 64,
P(r — p sin (t)) = B(r -\- p sin (p) + Wpsm . . . . (70)
Solving with respect to F (now P/), we have
W .
r + psin^+-=psm^
Pf = F ~ (71)
Making/ = 0, or sin ^ = 0, we have
Fo = R (72)
Hence, we have
^ = - - -^^"V ■ (^^>
/• + p sin ^ + ^-p sin
si
*
f
In which sin '^
vT+7
If we would take stiffness of cordage into account we must
add 8, (Eq. 69), to the second member of (70), and when we
make / = 0, we must also make 8=0, which gives for the
modulus,
M= LJUL^t (74)
r + p sin ^ + -^ ( Fp sin (^ + /S')
98 MECHAKICS. [75.
To find M experimentally we apply a weight P that is just
on the eve of overcoming the resistances : then will the quo-
tient of B by this weight be the value of the modulus.
Friction of Rope on a Fixed Axle.
78. Let the circle represent the cross-section of a fixed
cylindrical axlcj and let PLKR be a
rope tangent to it at L and K. Sup-
pose that a force P is on the eve
shown in the figure : there will be a p''' \. J
otion all alon? the rone. +:
5 /^
Kg. 76.
Let A, B, and G, be three consecu-
tive points of the arc KL, and denote the angle KOA by Q :
then will the angle between AB and the prolongation of OB
be equal to dd. If we denote the
tension on BA which acts to resist
motion by t, the tension on BC
tending to produce motion will be
denoted hj t -\- dt, and the reaction
Q due to these forces will be situated as shown in Fig. 77,
the angle being the angle of friction.
Because there is an equilibrium between t, t + dt, and Q,
we shall have (Eq. 16), *
t:t + dt:: sin (90° + (p) : sin (90° -> + dd) (75)
The third term of this proportion equals cos : sm 4> d9. (77)
78.] ELBMBNTAKY MACHINES. 99
Prom (77) we have, after reduction,
J=fde (78)
Integrating the first member from t = R io t =: P, and
the second member from fl = to 5 = KOL (denoted by 0'),
we have,
Passing to numbers, (79) becomes
P
R
OT P = Ref^' (80)
In (80), e = 3.71828, / is the coefQcient of friction be-
tween the rope and the cylinder, and 6' is the arc that
measures the angle KOL. The unit of 0' is the radian
which is very nearly equal to 57°.3.
Example. — ^Let the rope be wrapped entirely around the cylinder,
that is, let ff — 2w, and suppose that / = A. What is the value of P f
Ans: P = J2(3.71828)'-"» = ^ x 13.44 nearly.
Single Movable Pulley.
79. In this pulley the block is movable. The
resistance is applied by means of a hook attached
to the block ; one end of a rope, enveloping the
lower part of the pulley, is attached at a fixed
point, C, and the power is applied at its other ,
extremity. We shall suppose, in the first place, ^1
that the two branches of the rope are parallel.
Assuming the notation of Art. 75, neglecting
friction, and taking -4 as a centre of moments, Fig. 78.
we have, in case of equilibrium.
R
100
MECHANICS.
[81.
Px-^r = Br;
P = iB.
That is, when, the power and resistance are parallel,
the power is one half the resistance. The tension of the
cord OA is the same as that of BP. It is, therefore, equal
to one half the resistance. If the resistance of the point
be replaced by a force equal to P, the equilibrium will be
undisturbed.
In the second place, let the two
branches of the enveloping cord be
oblique to each other. Suppose the
resistance C to be replaced by a force
equal to P, and denote the angle be-
tween the two branches of the rope by
20. If there is an equilibrium between
P, P, and B, the horizontal compo-
nents of P, P, will balance each other,
and the sum of their vertical components will be equal to B ;
hence, we have,
'HP cos .l ■•■•■■«
In these equations, the origin of spaces is taken at the
point from which the body is projected downward.
Motion of Bodies Projected Vertically Upward.
95. Suppose a body projected Tertically upward from the
origin of spaces, with a Telocity v', and afterward acted on
by the force of gravity. In this case, the force of gravity
acts to retard the motion. Making, in (97) and (98), s' = 0,
f z= — g, and s = h, they become,
v = v' —gt (110)
h = v't — igf .... (Ill)
In these equations h is positive upward, and negative down-
ward.
From equation (110), we see that the velocity diminishes
as the time increases. The velocity is 0, when,
v'
v'—gi = 0, or when if =- (112)
v'
When t is greater than — , v is negative, and the body re-
traces its path : hence, the time required for the hody to
reach its highest elevation, is equal to the initial veloc-
ity, divided by the force of gravity.
Eliminating t, from (110) and (111), we have,
^=V (11^)
Making v.= 0, in the last equation, we have,
^ = -.....(114)
Hence, the greatest height to which the tody will
115] KINETICS. 121
ascend, is equal to the square of the initial velocity,
divided hy twice the force of gravity.
This height is that due to the initial Telocity (Eq. 108).
v'
It, in (110), we make t = f', we find,
9
v^gt' (115)
v'
If, in the same equation, we make t =z — 1- f , we find,
v=-9t' (116)
Hence, the velocities at equal times hefore and after
reaching the highest points are equal.
The difference of signs shows that the body is moving in
opposite directions at the times considered.
If we substitute these values of v successively, in (113), we
find in both cases,
^=—4^' (^1^)
hence, the points at which the velocities are equal, in ascend-
ing and descending, are equally distant from the highest
point; that is, they are coincident. Hence, if a body he
projected vertically upward, it will ascend to a certain
point, and then return upon its path, in such manner,
that the velocities in ascending and descending are
equal at the same points.
Examples.
1. Through what distance will a body fall from rest in a vacuum, in
10 seconds, and through what space will it fall during the last second?
Ans. 1608^/i;., and305J/i.
.2. In what time will a body fall from rest through 1300 feet?
Ans. 8.63 see.
3. A body was observed to fall through a height of 100 feet in the last
second. How long was the body falling, and through what distance did
it descend? Ms, < = §.9 ; s ;= 308.4 /<.
122 MECHANICS.
4. A body falls through 300 feet. Through what distance does it fall
in the last two seconds ?
Ans. The entire time occupied is 4.32 seconds. The distance fallen
through in 2.83 sec., is 86.57 ft. Hence, the distance required is 800 //. —
86.57/*. = 313.43 /if.
5. A body is projected upward, with a velocity of 60 feet. To what
height will it rise ? Ans. 55.9 ft.
6. A body is projected upward, with a velocity of 488 ft. In what
time will it rise 1610 feet ?
We have, from equation (111),
1610 = 483i! - 16tV<» ; .-. t=^^±i^;
or, t = 26.3 see., and t = 8.83 sec.
The smaller value of t gives the time required ; the larger value gives
the time occupied in rising to its greatest height, and returning to the
point 1610 feet from the starting-point.
7. A body is projected upward, with a velocity of 161 feet, from a
point 214f feet above the earth. In what time will it reach the earth,
and with what velocity will it strike ? Ans. 11.2 see. ; 199 ft.
8. Suppose a body to have fallen through 50 feet, when a second
begins to fall just 100 feet below it. How far will the latter body fall
before it is overtaken by the former ? Ans. 50 feet.
9. Suppose a body to descend from rest for 8| seconds, and then to
move uniformly for 3J seconds with the acquired velocity ; what is the
entire distance passed over ? Ans. 478 ft. nearly.
10. A body falls from a height of 400 ft. at the same instant that a
body is projected upward from the earth with a velocity of 100 ft. ; at
what height above the earth will they pass each other ? Ans. 142| ft.
11. With what velocity must a body be projected vertically upward,
that it may rise to a height of 210 ft. in 8 seconds ? Ans. 118J ft.
Restrained Vertical Motion.
96. We have seen (Eq. 93) that the measure of a moving
force is equal to the acceleration due to the force multiplied
by the mass moTed ; hence, conversely, the acceleration due
to a moving force is equal to the force divided by the mass
moved. Consequently, in case of a body falling freely, the
118.] KINETICS. 123
moTing force varies directly as the mass moved, the accelera-
tion g being constant. If, however, we increase the mass
moved, without changing the moving force, we shall corre-
spondingly diminish the acceleration.
To show how this may be done, let ^ be a fixed /^Y\
V^
pulley, mounted on a horizontal axis, and W and
W', unequal weights attached to the extremities
of a flexible cord passing over the pulley. If the
weight, W, be greater than W, the former will [^.
descend, and draw the latter up. '^
Fig. 93.
In this case, the moving force is the difference
of the weights, W and W ; the mass moved is the sum of the
masses of W and W, together with that of the pulley and
connecting cord. The different parts of the pulley move
with different velocities, but the effect of its mass may be
replaced by that of some other mass at the circumference of
the pulley. Denoting this mass, together with the mass of
the cord, by m", and the masses of W and W by m and m',
we have the Sntire mass moved equal to m + m' + m", and
for the moving force we have (»« — m')g ; hence, the accel-
eration, denoted by g', is given by the equation,
-j,g (118)
m -|- jre' -|- m"
This force being constant, the motion produced by it is
uniformly varied, and the circumstances of that motion will
be made known by substituting the above expression for/, in
equations (97) and (98).
Examples.
1. Two weights of 5 lbs. and 4 lis. are suspended from the extremities
of a cord passing over a fixed pulley, the weight of the pulley and cord
being neglected. What is the acceleration, what distance will each
weight describe in the first second, and what is the tension of the cord ?
134 MECHANICS.
Arts, gi = 3.574: ft. ; s = 1.787 /«. To find the tension of the cord
denoted \>j t : we have the moving force acting on the heavier body
equal to (5 — i) g, and the acceleration due to this force is ( — — 1 g ;
the moving force acting on the lighter body is {t — 4) g, and the corre-
sponding acceleration is | — j- j g ; equating these accelerations, and
solving, we have, < = 4f Iba.
3. A weight of 1 lb., hanging over a pulley, descends and drags a second
weight of 5 lbs. along a horizontal plane. Neglecting the mass of the
pulley and all hurtful resistances, to what will the acceleration be equal,
and through what space will the descending body move in the first
second ? Ans. g' = 5.3632 ft.; s = 3.6811 ft.
3. Two bodies, each weighing 5 lbs., are attached to a string passing
over a fixed pulley. What distance will each body move in 10 seconds,
when a pound weight is added to one of them, and what velocity wUl
have been generated at the end of that time, all hurtful resistances being
neglected ? Ans: s = 146.3 ft. ; v = 29.24: ft.
4. Two weights, of 16 oz. each, are attached to the ends of a string
passing over a fixed pulley. What weight must be added to one of them,
that it may descend through a foot in two seconds, hurtful resistances
being neglected ? '
w
Ans. The required weight being w, we have, g' = =^ g ; but
s = \g'l*, which for s = 1, and t = 2, gives, w = 0.505 oz.
Atwood's Machine.
97. Atwood's machine is a contrivance to illustrate the
laws of falling bodies. It consists of a vertical post, AB,
about 10 feet in height, supporting, at its upper extremity, a
fixed pulley, A. To obviate, as far as possible, the resistance
of friction, the axle is made to turn on friction rollers. A
silk string passes over the pulley, and at its extremities are
fastened two equal weights, C and D. To impart motion to
the weights, a small weight, G, in the form of a bar, is laid
on O, and by diminishing its mass, the acceleration may be
rendered as small as desirable.
The rod, A B, graduated to feet and decimals, is provided
KINETICS.
135
with sliding stages, E and F; the upper one is in the form
of a ring, vhich will permit G to pass, but not
G; the lower one is in the form of a plate,
which is intended to intercept the weight C.
Connected with the instrument is a seconds
pendulum for measuring time.
Suppose the weights, C and D, each equal to
150 grains, the weight of the bar 24 grains, and
let a weight of 62 grains at the circumference of
the pulley, produce the same resistance by its
inertia as that actually produced by the pulley
™. t
and cord. Then will the fraction ■
m -\- m' + m"
become equal to -^^ ; and this, multiplied by
32^, gives g' ■— 2. This value, substituted for g,
in (104) and (105), gives,
V = %t, and h = tK
Fig. 94.
If, in these equations, we make t =zl sec, we have h = 1,
and « = 2. If we make ^ = 2 sec, we, in like manner,
have A = 4, and v = 4. If we make / = 3 sec, we have
A = 9, and v = &, and so on. To verify these results ex-
perimentally, commencing with the first : — The weight, 0,
is drawn up till it comes opposite the of the graduated
scale, and the bar is placed on it. The weight thus set
is held in its place by a spring. The ring, E, is set at 1 foot,
and the stage, F, at 3 feet from.the 0. When the pendulum
reaches one of its extreme limits, the spring is pressed back,
the weight, CO, descends, and as the pendulum completes its
vibration, the bar O strikes the ring, and is retained. The
acceleration then becomes 0, and C moves on uniformly, with
the velocity acquired, during the first second ; and it will be
observed that G strikes the second stage just as the pendulum
completes its second vibration.
126 MECHANICS.
Had F been set at 5 feet from the 0, C would have reached
it at the end of the third vibration of the pendulum. Had
it been 7 feet from the 0, it would have reached it at the end
of the fourth vibration, and so on.
To verify the next result, we set the ring, E, at 4 feet from
the 0, and the stage, F, at 8 feet from the 0, and proceed as
before. The ring will intercept the bar at the end of the
second vibration, and the weight will strike the stage at the
end of the third vibration, and so on.
By making the weight of the bar less than 34 grains, the
acceleration is diminished, and, consequently, the spaces and
velocities, correspondingly diminished. The results may be
verified as before.
Motion of Bodies on Inclined Planes.
98. If a body is placed on an inclined plane, and aban-
doned to the action of its own weight, it will either slide or
roll down the plane, provided there be no friction between it
and the plane. If the body is spherical, it will roll, and in
this case friction may be disregarded. Let the weight of the
body be resolved into two components, one perpendicular to
the plane, and the other parallel to it : the plane of these
components will be vertical, and also perpendicular to the
given plane. The effect of the first component will be
counteracted by the resistance of the plane, whilst the second
will act as a constant force, urging the body down the plane.
The force being constant, the body will have a uniformly
varied motion, and equations (97) and (98) will be applicable.
The acceleration may be found by pro-
jecting the acceleration due to gravity
on the inclined plane.
Let AB represent the inclined plane,
and P the centre of gravity of a body jj^
resting on it. Let PQ represent the Fig. gs.
119-] KINETICS. • 127
force of gravity, denoted by g, and PR its component,
parallel to AB, PS being the normal component.
Denote PR by g', and the angle ABO by a. Then, since
PQ is perpendicular to BC, and QR to AB, the angle, RQP,
is equal to ABO, or to «. Prom the right-angled triangle,
PQR, we have,
g' = g sin a.
But the triangle, ABO, is right-angled, and, if we denote
its height, A 0, by h, and its length, AB, by ?, we shall have
sin a = y, which, being substituted above, gives,
/=f (119)
This value of g' is the acceleration due to the moving force.
Substituting it for/, in equations (97) and (98), we have,
• v = v'-\-^t, (119)
s^s' + v't + ^f^ (130)
If the body start from rest at A, taken as the origin of
spaces, then wiU v' — 0, and s' = 0, giv^g,
v = ^t (131)
s = §t' (133)
To find the time required for a body to move from the top
to the bottom of the plane, make s=l, in (133) ; there will
result.
Hence, the time varies directly as the length, and in-
versely as the square root of the height.
128
MECHANICS.
[134.
For planes having the same height, but different lengths,
the radical factor of the value of t remains constant. Hence,
the times required for a tody to move down planes having
the same height, are to each other as their lengths.
To determine the velocity with which a body reaches the
bottom of the plane, substitute for t, in equation (121), its
value taken from equation (123). We have, after reduction,
V = V^gh.
But this is the velocity due to the height h, Eq. 107.
Hence, the velocity generated in a hody whilst m,oving
down an inclined plane, is equal to that generated in
falling through the height of the plane.
Let be the centre of a circle in a vertical plane, and let
AB'bQ its vertical diameter. Through
A draw any chord A C and regard it as an
inclined plane, ; also draw CD perpendic-
ular to AB. Denote J C by I, AD by
h, and AB by 2r. The time required
for a body to roll down AO is, from
Eq. (123).
=VI-
But from a property of the circle, we have
I = VA X ir.
Substituting this in the preceding equation, we have after
reduction,
V^
2 {AB)
(124)
From (106) we see that this is the time required for a body
to fall through the height AB. Hence, the time required for
KIM-BTICS. 129
a body to roll down any chord through A is equal to the time
required for the body to fall through the vertical diameter ;
in other words, the time required for a body to roll down any
chord passing through the point A is constant.
Examples.
1. An inclined plane is 10 feet long and 1 foafc high. How long will
it take a body to roll from top to bottom, and what velocity will it ac-
quire. Ans. t = 2^ sec. nearly; v — S.02 ft.
_ 3. How far will a body descend from rest in 4 seconds, on an inclined
plane whose length is 400 feet, and whose height is 300 feet?
Ans. 193 ft.
3. How long will it take a body to descend 100 feet on a plane whose
length is 150 feet, and whose height is 60? Ans. 3.9 sec.
4. There is a track, 2^ miles in length, whose inclination is 1 in 35.
What velocity will a car attain, in running the length of the road, by
its own weight, hurtful resistances being neglected?
Ans. 155.15 ft., or, 106.3 m. per hour.
5. A railway train, having a velocity of 45 miles per hour, is detached
from the locomotive on an ascending grade of 1 in 300. How far, and
for what time, will the train continue to ascend the inclined plane ?
Ans. Distance = 13,540 ft.; t = 6m. 50.3 see.
6. A body weighing 6 lbs. descends vertically, and draws a weight of
6 lbs. up an ineliiied plane of 45°. How far wiU the first body descend
in 10 seconds? Ans. 3.44 ft,
Body Falling in a Resisting Medium.
99. In the cases hitherto considered, we have supposed
the motion to take place in vacuo: if a body falls through a
resisting medium, like the atmosphere, it will experience a
resistance which is generally assumed to vary as the square
of the velocity. This resistance acts to diminish the acceler-
ation due to gravity ; hence, the acceleration thus diminished
is expressed by the equation,
hence
(135), becomes,
s = ^l{vM + 1), (136)
Which shows the relation between the space s and the time t.
Falling Bodies when Gravity is Variable.
101. In accordance with the Newtonian law, the attraction
exerted by the earth on a body at different distances varies
inversely as the squares of those distances. Denoting the
radius of the earth, supposed a sphere, by r, the force of
gravity at the surface by g, any distance from the centre
greater than r, by s, and the force of gravity at that distance
by ^, we have
Substituting this value of 4> in (93), and at the same time
making it negative, because it acts in the direction of s nega-
tive, we have
gj.2
dt»
(137)
138.] KINETICS. 133
Multiplying by 2ds, and integrating both members, we have,
%='-^^a: o..^ = ^Jf^a (m)
If we make v = 0, when s — h, we have
0-^ + C- ■ o- ^^^'
0_ ^ +0, ..6_--^,
and, i;2 = 3^r3/-_^^ (139)
Equation (139) gives the velocity generated whilst the body
is falling from the height h to the height s. If we make
A =: cx), and s = r, (139) becomes,
v^ = 2gr; .: v =V2gr (140)
In this equation the resistance of the air is not considered.
If we make ff — 32.088 ft., and r = 30,933,596 ft., their
equatorial values, we find,
V — 36,664: ft., or nearly 7 miles.
That is, if a tody were to fall from an infinite dis-
tance to the surface of the earth, its terminal velocity
would he nearly 7 miles per second.
Equation (140) enables us to compute the terminal velocity*
of a body falling from an infinite distance to the sun. In
this case g = 890.16 ft., and r = 430,854.5 miles, and the
corresponding terminal velocity is,
V = 381 miles per second.
To find the time required for a body to fall through any
ds
space, substitute -r for v in (139), and solve the result with
respect to dt ; this gives.
134 MECHAKICS. [141.
7j / A ds'/s I li sds ., _.
^^ = -V 2-^ • V^iil = -y 3^ • V^7=7^ • ■ ■ ^''')
The negatiTe sign is taken because s decreases as t increases.
Reducing (141) by Formula E, and integrating by Formula
[36], Calculus, we find.
If ^ = when s = A, we have,
„ / h Tzh
This, in (143), gives,
^=\/3^[(^*-*)*-l^^"'''^^"¥+^^ — (^*^)
Making s = r in (143), we find.
Which gives the time required for a body to fall from a dis-
tance 7i to the surface of the earth or sun.
Body- Falling TJuder the Action of a Force that Varies as the
Distance.
103. If the earth were homogeneous, a point within its
surface would be attracted downward by- a force that would
be directly proportional to the distance from the centre
(Calculus, p. 198). Let us then suppose the earth to be
homogeneous and that an opening is made along a diameter
from surface to surface. Denote the acceleration at the
surface by ff, the radius by r, and the acceleration at a
146.] KINETICS. 135
distance s from the centre by ^. From the principle stated,
we have,
g:tt>::r:s; .: ^ = ^-s (145)
Substituting this in (92) and at the same time giving it the
minus sign because it acts in the direction of s negative, we
have,
d^s gs
Multiplying by 2ds and integrating, we have,
-rs=— ^— +C, ort;8=(7 — ^— (146)
dt^ r r ^ '
Making v = when s = r, we have C= -r^, and this in
(146) gives
v» =^{r'> — s>) (147)
If we make s = 0, we find v = Vgr, which is the velocity
at the centre ; it is also the maximum velocity. If the body
moves on beyond the centre, s becomes negative, and we find
that the velocities are equal at equal distances from the centre,
whether s be positive or negative. When s = — r, v reduces
to 0, ahd the body falls toward the centre again, and so on
continually.
To find the time required for the body to fall from surface
ds^
to surface, replace v^ by its value, ^ in (147) and solve with
respect to df, and making the result negative because t is a.
decreasing function of s, we have.
^^=-^/^V^f=S (''')
136 MECHANICS. [149-
Integrating (148) from r to —r and denoting the corre-
sponding time by t, we have.
i = "Y^J (149)
which we shall see hereafter is the time; of vibration of a
simple pendulum whose length is r.
The kind of motion considered in this article is called
hannonic, being the same as that of the particles of a vibra-
ting cord, or spring.
When the body sets out from one extremity A' of the
diameter A'O' to fall through that
diameter, suppose a second body to
start from the same point and to travel
around the semicircle A'MG' with a
constant velocity Vgr, the maximum
velocity of the first body. The time
required for the second body to reach '^'
Cwill be -nr -i- Vgr or it\/ -, that is, the two bodies will
reach C together.
It is easily shown that the velocity of the first body is
everywhere equal to the projection of the velocity of the
second body. For let B'H' be denoted by s ; then will the
velocity of the first body at H' be equal to A /-('■*— «')• Draw
IT' Jlf perpendicular to A'O', and at if draw MT io represent
the velocity '^/gr , and let MN be its projection parallel to
A'O'. We shall have MN= MTcos NMT; but cos NMT
^/r^ — :
: cos IT MB' = ^ ' ^ ° ; hence, MN=^\J^- (f-^), .
that is, the velocityof the first point at H' is the projection
of the corresponding velocity of the second point.
KINETICS.
137
From what precedes, we may regatd harmonic motion as
the projection of uniform circular motion, that is, if a point
revolves uniformly in a circle, the projection of the point on
a diameter will move harmonically..
2°. Plane Curvilikeab Motion.
Principle Employed.
103. If a material point moves in a plane curve, we may
regard its path as resulting from two simultaneous motions,
which are respectively parallel to two right lines lying in the
plane of the curve. Thus, we may conceive the point to be
moving parallel to the axis of X in accordance with a certain
law, and parallel to the axis of Y in accordance with some
other law ; or we may conceive it to be moving in the direc-
tion of the tangent according to some law, and in the direc-
tion of the normal in accordance with some other law.
In accordance with Newton's second law we may study the
motion of a body in any direction as though it had no motion
in any other direction.
Motion of a Point Down a Cnrve in a Vertical Plane.
104. Let a body fall down a curve, situated in a vertical
plane, under the action of
gravity regarded as constant ;
and let the axis of Y be
vertical, distances downward
being positive.
At any point of the curve
whose ordinate is y, the ac-
celeration due to gravity being
denoted by g, we have for the
tangential component of this
acceleration g sin 6, or (Calc.
in (92), we have
T
X
"\^
^
r
y
y"
^
p
e
^"/^
Y
/
\
i
/
12) g~-. Substituting this
138
MECHANICS.
[150.
' dy ds-d^s ,
■■^ds'''^^-=^^^-
Taking the integral between the limits y' and y we have,
after reduction,
v' = 25- (y - y'), oTv = V2g {y - y') (150)
The second member is the velocity due to the height y—y'.
Hence, the velocity generated in a body rolling down a
curve, gravity being constant, is equal to that generated
in falling freely through the same height.
ds
.Replacing v in (150) by -^ and solving, we have.
dt =
ds
ds
dy
V2g{y-y') dy^2g{y-y')
(151)
Integrating (151) between the proper limits, we have the time
of falling through the height, y — y'.
Time of Descent on an Inverted Cycloid.
105. Let APB represent one half of a branch of an in-
verted cycloid, the origin being
at A, and the values of y being
positive downward. Its differ-
ential equation (Oalc, p. 100)
is
, ydy
dx
. (152)
V^ry—y^
From (153) we find, by reduction.
y
y
Q
p
V
~-v^j^
IB
B
K~"~-^^^~__
dy
Fig. 99.
153.] KINETICS. 139
Substituting in (151), and reducing, we have,
dt=\F-. ^- ^ = (153)
To integrate the second member of (153), we make the dis-
tance y — y' = z; whence, "ilr — y = 'Hr — y' — z, and
dy = dz. Substituting in (153), it becomes
dt = A A . ^^ _^ (154)
V (/ V{2r —y')z — z> ^ '
Applying formula [26], Calculus, we have,
^ = Y/r.^ersin-^-?^,+^ (l^S)
If we suppose the body to fall from P to B, we have at P,
= 0, and at B we have, 2 = 3r — y'. Hence, the value of
t between those limits is
=v?
which is entirely independent of y' ; that is, the time re-
quired for a body to fall from any point of an inverted
cycloid to its vertex is constant.
Motion of Projectiles.
106. If a body be projected obliquely upward in a vacuum,
and then abandoned to the force of gravity, it will be con-
tinually deflected from a rectilinear path, and, after describ-
ing a curvilinear path, called its trajectory, will finally
reach the horizontal plane from which it started.
The starting-point is the point of projection ; the dis-
tance from the point of projection to the point at which the
140
MECHANICS.
[16T.
Fig. 100.
projectile again reaches the same horizontal plane is the
range, and the time occupied is the time of flight. The
only forces to be considered, are
the initial impulse and the force
of gravity. Hence, the trajectory
will lie in a vertical plane through
the direction of the initial impulse.
Let CAB be this plane, A the
point of projection, AB the range,
and AG & vertical through A.
Take AB and ^ C as co-ordinate axes ; denote the angle of
projection, DAB, by a, and the velocity due to the initial
impulse by v. Resolve v into two components, one in the
direction AG, and the other in the direction AB. We have,
for the former, v sin a, and, for the latter, v cos a.
The velocities, and, consequently, the spaces described in
the direction of the co-ordinate axes, will (Art. 103) be en-
tirely independent of each other. Denote the space described
in the direction A G, in any time t, by y. The circumstances
of motion in this "direction, are thos3 of a body projected
vertically upward with an initial velocity, v&ma, and then
continually acted on by the force of gravity. Hence, Equation
(111) is applicable. Making, in that equation h ■=y, and
«' = « sin a, we have.
y ■= V sin at — ^gt*
(157)
Denote the space described in the direction of the axis,
AB, in the time t, by x. The only force in this direction is
the component of the initial impulse. Hence, the motion
will be uniform, and the iirst of iequations (5) is applicable.
Making s = a, and v = vcoa a, we have,
X = V cos at (158)
If we suppose ^ to be the same in equations (157) and (158),
159.] KIKETICS. 141
they will be simultaneous, and taken together, will make
known the position of the projectile at any instant. Finding
the Talue of t from (158), and substituting in (157), we have,
sin « qx^ ,, „„.
y = X — —f — 5-, (159)
^ cos a iiV^ cos^ a ^ '
which expresses the relation between x and y for all values of
t ; hence, it is the equation of the trajectory. Denoting the
height due to v by Ti, we. have, v^ = 2^A, which reduces (159)
to the form
sin es 1 „
y = X — - , , x^ (160)
•' cos a 4:11 cos^ a ^ '
This equation satisfies the test b^ = iac (An. Geom., p. 158) ;
hence, we conclude that the trajectory is a parabola.
To find the range, make y = in (160) ; this gives,
a; = 0, and x— ih sin « cos a ;
the first value of x corresponds to the point of projection,
and the second is the value of the range. Denoting the range
by r, and making 2 sin a cos a =: sin 3a, we have,
r — 2hsm2a (161)
The range will be a maximum when a — 4:5°, in which case
we have,
r = 2Ji, (162)
If in (161) we replace tc by 90° — a, the value of r will not
be changed ; hence, there are two angles of projection,
complements of each other, that give the same range. The
trajectories in the two cases are not the same, as may be
shown by substituting the values of a, and 90° — a, in equa-
tion (160). The greater angle of projection gives a higher
elevation, and consequently, the projectile descends in a line
lia MECHANICS. [163.
nearer the vertical. It is for this reason that the gunner
selects the greater of the two, when he desires to crush an
object, and the less when he desires to batter,. or overturn the
object. If « = 90°, the value of r is 0. , That is, if a body
be projected vertically upward, it will return to the point of
projection.
To find the time of flight, make x = r in (158), and deduce
the value of t ; this gives,
t = — ^ (163)
V cos a ^ '
If the range and initial velocity are constant, the time of
flight will be greatest when « is greatest.
107. To find the highest point, JT, we have simply to find
the point where the tangent is horizontal. To do this, we
find the differential coefiBcient of y from equation (160), and
make it equal to ; this gives,
dy sin a X
dx cos « 3A cos^ a
= 0;
from which we find x = %h sin a cos «, or half the range ;
substituting this in (160), we find y = h sin^ « ; these values
of X and y are the co-ordinates of K.
To find the equation of the trajectory referred to parallel
axes through K, we first change the sign of y in (160), so
that ordinates may be positive downward ; this gives,
sin a 1 „
cos a 4ji cos^ a
In this equation we make,
y ^= y' — h 8va? a, and x = x' ■\- 2h sin a cos a,
and reduce: the resulting equation, after dropping the dashes,"
is,
x^ = 4Jicos^ay (164)
165.] KINETICS. 143
In this parabola the parameter is 4A cos^ a, and conse-
quently the distance from K to the directrix is h cos* a ; add-
ing this to the ordinate of K, which is h sin* a, we see that
the directrix of the curve is at a distance from AB equal to A.
The distance from K to the focus is equal to h cos* « :
hence, if ct < 45°, the focus is below AB ; if « = 45°, the
focus \5 GO. AB; if a > 45°, the focus is above AB.
108. To find an angle of projection such that the trajec-
tory may pass through a given point, we substitute in (160),
for the reciprocal of cos* a, its value 1 -f tan* « ; that equa-
tion may then be written,
4:hy = 4:h tan ecx — (1 -|- tan* ee) xK
Denoting the co-ordinates of the given point by x', and y',
the equation of condition that the curve shall pass through
it is,
ihy' = 4A tan ax' — (1 + tan* «)«'*,
which can be written,
tan* a r tan a = ^—j^ (165)
Solving (165), we have.
tan a = r — " (166)
X '
This shows that there are two angles of projection, under
either of which, the point may be struck.
If we suppose, '
a;'* = 4/%* — 47j?/', (167)
the quantity under the radical sign will be 0, and the two
angles of projection will become one.
If x' and y' be regarded as variables, equation (16?) repre-
sents a parabola whose axis is a vertical line, through the
144
MECHANICS.
point of projection. Its vertex is at a distance, Ji, above the
point. A, its focus is at A, and its parameter is AJi, or twice
the maximum range.
If we suppose,
^'2 < iJii _ /Uiy',
the point {x', y'), will lie within the parabola just described,
the quantity under the radical sign will be positive, and there
will be two real values of tan «, and, consequently, two
angles of projection, under either of which the point may be
struck.
If we suppose,
a;'2 > 4/^2 — Ahy',
the point {x', ?/'), will be without this parabola, the values of
tan a will both be im-
aginary, and there will
be no angle under which
the point can be struck.
Let the parabola
B'LB represent the
curve whose equation is
x'» = 4^2 — 47««/'.
donceive it to be revolved about AL, as an axis, generating
a paraboloid of revolufion. Then, from what precedes, we
conclude, first, that every point within the surface may be
reached from A, under two different angles of projection;
secondly, that every point on the surface
can be reached, but only by a single angle of
projection; thirdly, that no point without
the surface can be reached at all.
109. If a body is projected horizontally
from an elevated point, A, its trajectory
will be made known from equation (160) by Kg. 102.
168-] KINETICS. 145
simply making « = ; whence, sin a = 0, and cos « = 1.
Substituting and reducing, we have,
x^ z=: —4Ji,y (168)
For every value of x, y is negative, which shows that the
trajectory lies below the horizontal through the point of pro-
jection. If we suppose ordinates to be positive downward,
we have,
a? = 4Jiy (169)
To find the point at which the trajectory will reach any
horizontal plane whose distance below A is h', we make
«/ = A' in (169), whence,
X — 2Vhh' (170)
On account of the resistance of the air, the results of the
preceding discussion must be greatly modified. They ap-
proach more nearly to the observed phenomena, as the
velocity is diminished and the density of the projectile in-
creased. The atmospheric resistance increases as the square
of the velocity, and as the cross section of the projectile ex-
posed to the action of the resistance. In the air, it is found,
under ordinary circumstances, that the maximum range is
obtained by an angle of projection, not far from 34°.
Note. — In the following examples atmospheric resistance is neglected.
Examples.
1. What is the time of flight of a projectile in vacuum, when the angle
of projection is 45°, and the range 6000 feet ? Ans. 19.3 sec.
2. What is the range of a projectile, when the angle of projection is
30°, and the initial velocity 200 feet ? Ans. 1076.9 ft.
3. The angle of projection under which a shell is thrown is 33°, and
the range 3350 feet. What is the time of flight ?
Ans. 11.35 ?ec., nearly.
146 MEOHAKICS.
4 Find the angle of projection and velocity of projection of a shell, so
that its trajectory shall pass through two points, the co-ordinates of the
first being x = 1700 ft, j^ = 10 ft, and of the second, x = 1800 ft,
y = 10 ft Ans. a = 39'19" ; v = 2218.3 ft.
5. At what elevation must a shell be projected with a velocity of 400
feet, that it may range 7500 feet on a plane which descends at an angle
of 30° ?
SoIjUtion. — The co-ordinates of the point at which the shell strikes are,
xf — 7500 cos 30° = 6495 ; and y' = - 7500 sin 30° = - 3750.
And denoting the height due to the velocity 400 ft, by h, we have,
7i = ^ = 2486 /if.
Substituting these values in the formula.
. _2h± VW-Thy' - a;'"
x'
and reducing, we have,
Ans. a = 4:° 34' 10" ; and a = 55° 25' 41".
Tangential and Normal Components.
110. A point cannot move in a curve except under the
action of an incessant force, whose direction is inclined to the
direction of the motion. This force is called the deflecting
force, and can be resolved into two components, one in the
direction of the motion, and the other at right angles to it.
The former acts simply to increase or diminish the velocity,
and is called the tangential force : the latter acts to turn
the point from its rectilinear direction, and being directed
toward the centre of curvature is called the centripetal
force.
The normal reaction, which is equal and directly opposed
to the centripetal force, is called the centrifugal force.
To find expressions for the tangential and centripetal
forces, let the acceleration due to the deflecting force at any
ITl.]
KINETICS.
147
point, P, of the curve be resolved into components parallel
to the axes OX and OY, and denote these components re-
spectively by <^' and 0". Let these
components be again resolved into
components acting tangentially
along PT, and normally along PN.
Denote the algebraic sum of the
tangential components by T, and
the algebraic sum of the normal
components by N. Assuming the
notation of the figure, we have.
T
n\
/C\
'P
/
A^
S.
/
X
Kg. 103.
r=0'cos6l + ^"sin6i (171)
JV=^' sin — 0" cos 61 (173)
But from Art. 92,
0' = ^, and 0"=-^/,
and from Calculus, p. 12, we have,
„ dx -, . . dt/
cos ^ -j- , and sm 6 = -r-.
ds ds
Substituting these in (171), and reducing, on the supposi-
tion that t is the independent variable, we have,
„_^ dx d^ dy
dP ' ds'^ dP ' ds
_d(d^j±_df) _ d (ds^) _ d^s
~ dp = %ds ~ dP • 2ds " dt^
(173)
Substituting the same quantities in (173), we have,
d^'x - dy — d^y • dx _ ds^ dx • d^y — dy • d^x
N =
dP • ds
dp
148 MECHANICS. [IT*.
But the second factor of the last member is equal to the
reciprocal of the radius of curvature denoted by R (Calculus,
p. 65) ; substituting this in the preceding equation, and re-
ducing, we have,
^=-J, (174) ■
which is equal and directly opposed to the acceleration due
to the centrifugal force. Denoting the centrifugal force,
when the mass of the body is M, by F, we have,
^ = qf . . . . . (175)
Hence, the centrifugal force of a body, whose mass is
M, that is, the force that it exerts normally to the
curve which it is compelled to describe, varices directly
as its mass into the square of its velocity, and inversely
as the radius of curvature of the curve.
The subject of centriiiigal force will be further considered hereafter.
3°. Pbbiodic MoTioiT.
Rectilinear and Curvilinear Vibration.
111. Periodic motion is a kind of variable motion, in
which the spaces described in certain equal periods of time
are equal. This kind of motion is exemplified in the phe-
nomena of vibration, of which there are two cases.
1st. Rectilinear vibration. Theory indicates, and experi-
ment confirms the fact, that if a particle of an elastic fluid
be slightly disturbed from its place of rest, and then aban-
doned, it will be urged back by a force, varying directly as
its distance from the position of equilibrium ; on reaching
this position, the particle will, by virtue of its inertia, pass to
the other side, again to be urged back, and so on.
176.] KINETICS. 149
To find the time required for the particle to pass from one
extreme position to the opposite one and back, let us denote
the displacement at any time t by s, and the acceleration due
to the restoring force by <^ ; then, from the law of the force,
we shall haye = w's, in which n is constant for the same
fluid at the same temperature. Substituting for its value.
Equation (92), and recollecting that acts in a direction con-
trary to that in which s is estimated, we have,
• -w = -'^ (1^^)
Multiplying both members of (176) by Ms, we have.
df
whence, by integration.
= %n^sds ;
-^ = nh^+ G=- tfl.
dv
The velocity v will be when s is greatest possible ; denot-
ing this value of s by a, we shall have,
n^c? + C = ; whence, C = — r^a^.
Substituting this value of G in the preceding equation, it
becomes,
j,2 = ^=^2(flS_43)j whence, ndt= ^-= ...(iyy)
dr V a* _ ^
Integrating the last equation, we have,
nt-^ <7=sm-'| (1'^^)
Taking the integral between the limits s = -\- a and
150
MECHANICS.
s = — a, and denoting the corresponding time by ^r, t being
the time of a double vibration, we have.
\nT = TT ; whence, t =
277
The value of t is independent of the extent of the excur-
sion, and dependent only upon n. Hence, in the same
medium, and at the same temperature, the time of vibration
is constant.
2ndly. Curvilinear vibration. Let ABG be a vertical
plane curve, symmetrical with respect
to BB. Let ^ C be a horizontal line,
and denote the distance SB by h. If
a body were placed at A and aban-
doned to the action of its own weight,
being constrained to remain on the
curve, it would, in accordance with
preceding principles, move toward
B with an accelerated motion, and, on arriving at B, would
possess a velocity due to the height h. By virtue of its inertia
it would ascend the branch BO with retarded motion, and
would finally reach O, where its velocity would be 0. The
body would then be in the same condition that it was at A,
and would, consequently, descend to B and again ascend to
A, whence it would again descend, and so on. Were there
no retarding causes, the motion would continue for ever.
From what has preceded, it is obvious that the time occupied
by the body in passing from ^ to 5 is equal to that in passing
from B to C, and also the time in passing from C to 5 is
equal to that in passing from B to A. Further, the velocities
of the body when at G and H, any two points lying on the
same horizontal, are equal, either being that due to the
height BJ^.
I'S] KIKETICS. 151
Angular Velocity.— Angiilar Acceleration.
113. When a body revolves about an axis, its points, being
at different distances from the azis, will have different veloc-
ities. The angular velocity is the velocity of a point whose
distance from the axis is equal to 1. To obtain the velocity
of any other point, we multiply its distance from the axis by
the angular velocity. To find a general expression for the
velocity of any point of a revolving body, let us denote the
angular velocity by co, the space passed over by a point at the
unit's distance from the axis in the time dt, by dd. The
quantity dO is an infinitely small arc, having a radius equal
to 1 ; and, as in Art. 93, it is plain that we may regard the
angular motion as uniform, during the infinitely small time
dt. Hence, as in Article 93, we have,
d0
If we denote the distance of any point from the axis by I,
and its velocity by v, we shall have,
« = Zw; or, « = Z^ (179)
The angular acceleration due to a force is the rate at
which the force can impart angular velocity. If we denote it
hy 01, we have, as in Art. 93,
_do) _^
'P'-'dt- dfi-
The corresponding acceleration of a point whose distance
from the axis is I, will be,
% = Z^ (180)
The corresponding measure of the moving force is found
by multiplying (180) by the mass m.
153 MBCHAN-ICS. [181
The Simple Pendulum.
113. A pendulum is a heavy body suspended from a
horizontal axis, about which it is free to yibrate. In order
to investigate the circumstances of vibration, let us first con-
sider the hypothetical case of a single material point vibrating
about an axis, to which it is attached by a rod destitute of
weight. Such a pendulum is called a simple pendulum.
The laws of vibration, in this case, will be identical with those
explained in Art. Ill, the arc ABC being the arc of a circle.
The motion is, therefore, periodic.
Let ABC 'bQ the arc through which
the vibration takes place, and denote its
radius by I. The angle CD A is called
the amplitude of vibration ; half of
this angle ADB, denoted by «, is called
the angle of deviation ; and I is called
the length of the pendulum. If the
point starts from rest, 2A, A, it will, on
reaching any point li, of its path, have a velocity v, due to
the height UK, denoted by h. Hence,
V = Vap" (181)
If we denote the variable angle HDB by 6, we shall have
DE = loosO ; we shall also have I)£! = I cos a; and since h
is equal to DK — DU, we shall have,
h = I (cos — cos a).
Which, being substituted in the preceding formula, gives,
V = V^gl (cos — cos «).
From the preceding article, we have,
,d0
at
1 82.] KINETICS. 153
Equating these two values of v, we have.
'dt-
VUgl (cos 6 — cos«).
Whence, by solving with respect to dt.
dt
v:
de
^9 -v/cos 6 — cos «
(182)
If we develop cos 6 and cos a into series, by McLaukin's
theorem, we shall have,
cose = l--+j^-^-etc.;
cos«=l--+^^^-etc.
When tc is very small, say two or three degrees, 6 being
still smaller, we may neglect all the terms after the second as
inappreciable, giving
cosS — cos a = ^(a' — 6^).
Substituting in equation (182), it becomes,
dt^\/-.—^^^= (183)
_d9_
Integrating equation (183), we have.
t =z\/- sin-' + C.
9 «
Taking the integral between the limits 6 z=a and 6-= — a,
t will denote the time of one vibration, and we shall have.
V 9
(184)
154 MECHANICS. [185.
Hence, the time of vibration of a simple pendulum,
is equal to the numAer 3.1416, m^ultiplied into the
square root of the quotient obtained by dividing the
length of the pendulum, by the force of gravity.
For a pendulum, whose length is V, we shall have,
34) and (185), we have,
or, t : t' :: VT : VV (186)
From equations (184) and (185), we have, by division,
t__Vl
That is, the times of vibration of two simple pendu-
lums, are to each other as the square roots of their
lengths.
If we suppose the lengths of two pendulums to be the
same, but the force of gravity to vary, as it does slightly in
difEerent latitudes, and at different elevations, we shall have,
t = ^\J^-, and r = 7rY^,.
Whence, by division,
or, t : t" :: Vf ■■ Vg (187)
7'-y g'
That is, the times of vibration of the same simple
pendulum, at two different places, are to each other
inversely as the square roots of the forces of gravity
at the two places,
If we suppose the times of vibration to be the same, and
the force of gravity to vary, the lengths will vary also, and
we shall have.
7r\/-, and t ■= tt\ / —.•
\ g ■■ \ g'
188.] KINETICS. 155
Equating these values and squaring, we have,
\ = y, or, l:l'::g:g' (188)
That is, the lengths of simple pendulums which vi-
brate in equal times at different places, are to each
other as the forces of gravity at those places.
Vibrations of equal duration are called isochronal.
De TAmbert's Principle.
114. When several bodies are rigidly connected, it often
happens that they are constrained to move in a different
manner from what they would, if free. Some move faster
and some slower than they would, were it not for the connec-
tion. In the former case there is a gain, and in the latter a
loss, of moving force, in consequence of the connection. It
is obvious that the resultant of all the impressed forces is
equal to that of all the effective forces, for if the latter were
reversed, they would hold the former in equilibrio.
Hence, all the moving forces lost and gained in con-
sequence of the connection are in equilibrium.
This is known as De I'Ambert's principle.
The Compound Pendulum.
115. A compound pendulum is a body free to vibrate
about a horizontal axis, called the axis of suspension.
The straight line drawn from the centre of gravity of the
pendulum perpendicular to the axis of suspension is called
the axis of the pendulum.
In practical applications, the pendulum is so shaped that
the plane through the axis of suspension and the centre of
gravity divides it symmetrically.
Were the particles of the pendulum entirfely disconnected.
156 • MECHANICS.
but constrained to remain at invariable distances from the
axis of suspension, we should have a collection of simple
pendulums. Those at equal distances from the axis would
vibrate in equal times, and those unequally distant would
vibrate in unequal times. The particles nearest the axis
would vibrate more rapidly than the compound pendulum,
and those most remote would vibrate slower; hence, there
must be intermediate points that would vibrate in the same
time as the pendulum. These points lie on the surface of a
circular cylinder whose axis is that of suspension ; the point
in which this cylinder cuts the axis of the pendulum is called
the centre of oscillation. If the entire mass of the pen-
dulum were concentrated at this point, the time of its vibra-
tion would be unchanged.
Hence, the centre of oscillation of a compound pen-
dultim is a point of its axis, at which, if the mass of the pen-
dulum were concentrated, its time of vibration would be un-
changed. A line drawn through this point, parallel to the
axis of suspension, is called the axis of oscillation. The
distance between the axis of oscillation and the axis of sus-
pension is the length of an equivalent simple pendulum,
that is, of a simple pendulum, whose time of vibration is the
same as that of the compound pendulum.
Angnlar Acceleration of a Compound Pendulum.
116. Let GK be a compound pendulum, C its axis of sus-
pension, G its centre of gravity, and suppose the plane of the
paper to pass through the centre of gravity, G, and perpen-
dicular to the axis, G. We may regard the pendulum as
made up of infinitely small filaments, parallel to the axis of
suspension, and consequently perpendicular to the paper.
The circumstances of vibration will be unchanged if we sup-
pose each element to be concentrated in. the point where it
meets the plane of the paper. Denote the mass of any such
KINETICS.
157
Fig. 103.
element, as S, by m, ijs distance from G, by r, and tbe mass
of the entire pendulum by M.
Through Cdraw a horizontal line, OB, and draw SB, OA,
and PB, perpendicular to it. On HS prolonged, take SE to
represent the moving force impressed
on 8. Then will 8E be equal to mg,
(Bq. 93), and its moment with respect
to G will be mg x HO. Denote the
angular accelerationhj (p^; then will the
actual acceleration of S, in a direction
perpendicular to SO, be equal to r(pi
(Eq. 180), and the effective moving
force to inri ; because this force acts
at right angles to SO, its moment is
equal to mr^^i. Because mg is the
moving force impressed on S, and 'mri, and a gain when mg is less than mrcpy The moment of
this force with respect to O is equal to mg x Off — mr^^.
Similar expressions may be found for each of the elementary
particles of the pendulum.
By de I'Ambert's principle, the moving forces lost and
gained, in consequence of the connection of the parts, are in
equilibrium ; hence, the algebraic sum of their moments with
respect to the axis, 0, is equal to 0, that is,
S{mg xOff)—:s. (mr^cPi) = 0.
But 01 and g are the same for each particle ; hence,
_ S(ot xOH)
fi- s (mr«) ^'
Prom the principle of moments, we have,
S (ot X Off) = Mx GA.
158 MECHANICS. [189.
Substituting above, ve have, finally,
M xCA . .
That is, the angular aoceleration varies as, CA,'the
lever arm of the weight of the pendulum.
The expression X (mr^) is called the moment of inertia
of the body with respect to the axis of suspension, Mg is the
weight of the body, and Mg x CA is the moment of the
weight, with respect to the same axis.
Hence, the angular acceleration is equal to the mo-
ment of the weight, divided by the moment of inertia,
both tahen with respect to the axis of suspension.
Length of an Eqnivalent Simple Pendulum.
117. To find the length of a simple pendulum that will
vibrate in the same time as the given compound pendulum,
let be the centre of oscillation, and draw OB perpendicular
to CB. Denote GO by I, and GO by k. Were the entire
mass concentrated at 0, each value of mr would become equal
to ml, and we should have, for its moment of inertia, J/f,
and for the moment of the mass, M x GB, and for the angu-
lar acceleration,
M xCB
But the pendulum is to vibrate in the same time, whether it
exist as a compound pendulum, or as a simple pendulum, its
mass being concentrated at its centre of oscillation ; the value
of 01 must, therefore, be the same in both cases. Placing the
value just deduced equal to that in equation (189), we have,
MxCB MxGA
MP ^ ~ £(w3)^'
190.]
KINETICS.
159
whence, by reduction.
Jf ^8 = 2 (jwr2) X
GB
CA
From the similar triangles, OGA and COB, we have,
GB
CA
h
Substituting, and reducing, we have,
' = ^ a»)
That is, fhe length of the equivalent simple jjendu-
lum is equal to moment of inertia of the pendulum
divided by the moment of its mass, both taken with
respect to the axis of suspension.
Beciprocity of Axes of Suspension and Oscillation.
118. Let G be the axis of suspension, the centre of
oscillation, and let a line be drawn through parallel to the
axis of suspension. This line is called
the axis of oscillation. Let the
planfe of the paper be taken as before,
and suppose the elements projected on
it, as in Article 116.
Let 8 be any element, and denote
its distance frofti the axis of suspension
by r, and from the axis of oscillation
by t ; denote OC by I, and the angle
OGShj(l>.
If the axis of oscillation be taken as an axis of suspension,
and the length of the corresponding simple pendulum, de-
noted by r, we have, from the preceding article,
Fig. 107.
I'.
M{1 — k)
(191)
100 MECHANICS. [193.
In the triangle, OSC, we have,
hence,
J.{m&) — I,{mr^) + J,{mP) — 2J.{mr gos0)Z.
But, from equation (190), we have,
X{mr^) = MM ;
and because I is invariable, we have,
l.{niF) = S(m)Z3 = MP ;
if we suppose CO horizontal, rcos^, the projection of r
on CO, will be the lever-arm of m, and the expression,
S [mr cos )?= Mkl.
Substituting for these expressions their values given above,
and putting the value of S (mfi), thus found, in (191), we
have,
, _ MJcl + MH^ — ^Mkl _ M{P — M) .
"~ M{1 -k) ~ M{1 — h) '
or,
I' = 1 (192)
Hence, the axis of suspension and oscillation are
convertible; that is, if either be taken as an axis of
suspension, the other will be the axis of oscUlation.
This property of the compound pendulum is employed to
determine the length of the seconds' pendulum, and the
value of the force of gravity at different places on the sur-
face of the earth.
KIKETICS. 161
The Beversible Pendulum.
^
119. A reversible pendulum sufficiently accurate for
purposes of illustration may be constructed as follows. A
rectangular bar of steel, CD, about four feet long, is
provided witb two knife-edge axes, A and B, having ^
their edges turned toward each other ; these axes are [uV]
attached to sliding sleeves with clamp screws, so that
they may be set at different points of the bar CD ; the
axes should be mounted so that they shall be perpen-
dicular to the plane of the bar, and so that their plane
shall pass through the axis of the bar.
The pendulum thus constructed is suspended on
horizontal plates of hard steel, so placed that the pen-
dulum may vibrate freely between them, and around p. ^
either axis at pleasure.
To adjust the axes A and B so the times of oscillation
around them shall be equal, we proceed by the method of
approximation. Set the axis A in some convenient position,
and allow the pendulum to vibrate ; note the time required
to make, say 100 vibrations ; then, dividing this by 100, we
have the time of a single vibration. Substitute this value for
t, in (184), and deduce the corresponding value of I. Set
the axis 5 at a distance from A equal to I, and we have a
first approximation.
Eeversing the pendulum, and repeating the operation, we
find a second approximation. By continuing this process of
approximation, we ultimately find two positions of the axes
around which the times of vibration are equal. The distance
between the axes is then the length of the equivalent simple
pendulum.
Knowing the length of the equivalent simple pendulum
and the corresponding time of vibration, we may determine
the acceleration due to the force of gravity from formula (184);
162 MECHANICS. [193.
we may also find the length of a seconds' pendTilTim;
that is, of a pendulum, that vibrates once in a second, from
the proportion (186), by making t' = 1, and substituting the
known values of t and I.
The pendulum used for scientific purposes is far more
complex in its modes of adjustment and use than the one
above described, and far greater precautions are taken to
avoid errors. Pendulums of this kind have been used for
determining the figure of the earth, and for various other
scientific purposes.
By a series of carefully conducted experiments, it has been
found that the length of a seconds' pendulum in the Tower
of London is 3.2616 ft., or 39.13921 inches.
Experiments made in different latitudes show that the
force of gravity continually increases from the equator to-
ward either pole. According to Plantamour's modification
of Bessel's barometric formula, the value of g is given for
any latitude by the formula
5r = 5''(l — .0026257 cos 3Z), (193)
in which g' is its value in latitude 45°, and L is the latitude
of the given place.
According to Airy, the value of g' is about 32.17/^. This,
in (193), gives
g = 32.17(1 — .0026257 cos2Z).
For the latitude of New York (40° 45'), we have,
^=33.16/^. nearly.
Formula (193) takes account of the variation of g, due to
latitude only. It may be still further modified to take ac-
count of variation in height above the level of the sea, as fol-
lows : let g be the value of gravity at the level of the sea in
19*-1 KINETICS. 163
the latitude L, and let g" be its value in the same latitude at
an eleyation above the sea level denoted by « ; if we denote
the radius of the earth by R, we shall then have, by the
Newtonian law,
g-.f-.'.^R^zf-.m, or, g" =g.^^^.
Developing the denominator, and dividing R^ by it, neglect-
ing all terms of the quotient after the second, as insignificant,
we have,
Substituting in (193), we have,
g" = g'{l — .0026257 cos 2^) (l - S (194)
From which we may find the value of gravity in any latitude,
and at any elevation. If z is given in feet, R must also be
given in feet : it is assumed that,
R = 20,886,860 ft.
Practical Application of the Pendulum.
130. One of the most important uses of the pendulum is
to regulate the motion of clocks. A clock consists of a train
of wheelwork, the last wheel of the train connecting with a
pendulum-rod by a piece of mechanism called an escape-
ment. The wheelwork is kept in motion by a descending
weight, or by the elastic force of a spring, and the wheels are
so arranged that one tooth of the last wheel in the train
escapes from the pendulum-rod at each vibration of the
pendulum, or at each beat. The number of beats is rendered
visible on a dial-plate by indices, called hands.
164 MECHANICS.
On account of expansion and contraction, the length of the
pendulum is liable to variation, which gives rise to irregu-
larity in the times of vibration. To obviate' this, and to
render the times of vibration uniform, several devices have
been resorted to, giving rise to what are called compensat-
ing pendulums. "We shall indicate two of the most im-
portant of these, observing that the remaining ones are nearly
the same in principle, differing only in mode of application.
Graham's Mercurial Pendulum.
131. Graham's mercurial pendulum consists of a rod
of steel about 43 inches long, branched toward its lower end,
to embrace a cylindrical glass vessel 7 or 8 inches deep, and
having between 6 and 7 inches of this depth filled with
mercury. The exact quantity of mercury, being dependent
on the weight and expansibility of the other parts of the pen-
dulum, may be determined by experiment in each case.
When the temperature increases, the steel rod is lengthened,
and, at the same time, the mercury rises in the cylinder.
When the temperature decreases, the steel bar is shortened,
and the mercury falls in the cylinder. By a proper adjust-
ment of the quantity of mercury, the effect of the lengthening
or shortening of the rod is exactly counterbalanced by the
rising or falling of the centre of gravity of the mercury, and
the axis of oscillation is kept at an invariable distance from
the axis of suspension.
Harrison's Gridiron Pendulum.
123. Harrison's gridiron pendulum consists of five
rods of steel and four of brass, placed alternately with each
other, the middle rod, or that from which the bob is sus-
pended, being of steel. These rods are connected by cross-
pieces in such a manner that, whilst the expansion of the
steel rods tends to elongate the pendulum, or lower the
KINETICS. 165
boby the expansion of the brass rods tends to shorten the
pendulum, or raise the bob. By duly propor- «
tioning the sizes and lengths of the bars, the axis
of oscillation may be maintained at an invariable
distance from the axis of suspension. From what
has preceded, it follows that whenever the dis-
tance from the axis of oscillation to the axis of
suspension remains invariable, the times of vibra-
tion must be absolutely equal at the same place.
The pendulums just described are principally
used for astronomical clocks, where great accu- , .,
racy and uniformity in the measure of time are
indispensable. ^'s- ''^•
Basis of a System of Weights and Measures.
123. The pendulum is of further importance, in a practi-
cal point of view, in furnishing the standard that has been
made the basis of the English system of weights and measures.
It was enacted by Parliament, in 1834, that the distance
between the centres of two gold studs in a certain described
brass bar, the bar being at a temperature of 63° F., should be
an " imperial standard yard." To be able to restore it in
case of its destruction, it was enacted that the yard should be
considered as bearing to the length of the seconds' pendulum
in the latitude of London, in vacuum, and at the level of the
sea, the ratio of 36 to 39.1.393. From the yard, every other
unit of linear measure may be derived, and thence all meas-
ures of area and volume.
It was also enacted that a certain described brass weight,
made in 1758, and called 3 lbs. Troy, should be regarded as
authentic, and that a weight equal to one half that should be
"the imperial standard Troy pound." The -jV^^th part
of the Troy pound was called a grain, of which 7000 con-
stituted a pound avoirdupois. To provide for the con-
166 MECHANICS.
tingeney of a loss of the standard, it was connected with the
system of measures, by enacting, that if lost, it should be
restored by allowing 252.724 grains for the weight of a cubic
inch of distilled water, at 63° P., the water being weighed in
vacuum and by brass weights. From the grain thus estab-
lished, all other units of weight may be derived.
Our own system of weights and measures is the same as
that of the English.
Examples.
1. The lengtli of a seconds' pendulum is 39.13931 in. If it be shortened
0.130464 in., how many vibrations wUl be gained in a day of 24 hours?
Ans. 144 nearly.
2. A seconds' pendulum on being carried to the top of a mountain,
was observed to lose 5 vibrations per day of 86400 seconds. Required
the height of the mountain, reckoning the radius of the earth at 4000
miles. Ans. h = 0.2815 mi. = 1322 ft.
3. "What is the time of vibration of a pendulum whose length is 60 in.,
when the force of gravity is 32 J ft. ? Ans. 1.3387 see.
4. How many vibrations will a pendulum 36 inches in length make
in one minute, the force of gravity being the same as before ?
Ans. 63.58.
5. A pendulum makes 43170 vibrations in 12 hours. How much must
it be shortened that it may beat seconds ? Ans. .0544 in.
6. In a certain latitude, the length of a pendulum vibrating seconds is
39 inches. What is the length of a pendulum vibrating seconds, in the
same latitude, at the height of 21000 feet above the first station, the
radius of the earth being 3960 miles ? Ans. 38.9318 in.
7. If a pendulum make 40000 vibrations in 6 hours, at the level of
the sea, how many vibrations will it make in the same time, at an eleva-
tion of 10560 feet, the radius of the earth being 3960 miles ?
Ans. 39979.8.
8. What is the length of a pendulum that will beat sidereal seconds,
the length of the sidereal day being 23 firs. 56 min. 4 sec. ?
Ans. 39.0334 inches.
9. What is the length of a pendulum that makes as many vibrations
per minute as it is laches long ? Ans. 53.03 inches.
VI.— OENTEIPUGAL FO EC E.— MOMENT OP
IN"EETIA.
Centrifogal Force in Terms of Ang^ilar Velocity.
124. When a material point is constrained to move in a
curve it offers a resistance to the force that deflects it from
its rectilineal path. This resistance, as stated in Article 110,
is called the centrifugal force. It is shown, in the article
referred to, that the value of the centrifugal force is given by
the Equation,
F=m~, (195)
in which m is the mass of the particle, v its lineal velocity,
and r the radius of curvature of its path at the instant in
question.
If we denote the angular velocity of the point around the
centre of curvature by w, its linear velocity will be equal to
rw, and this substituted in (195), gives
F=mr(^ (196)
This equation is often more convenient than (195). If we
suppose the point to be restrained by a rigid curve, the centrif-
ugal force is equal, and directly opposed to the reaction of
the curve. If the material point m is whirled around a fixed
point, being retained by a string, the centrifugal force is the
measure of the tension of the string.
168 MECHANICS.
Centrifugal Force of an Extended Mass.
135. "We have supposed, in what precedes, that the dimen-
sions of the body under consideration are extremely small ;
let us next examine the case of a body, of any dimensions
whatever, constrained to revolve about a fixed axis. If the
body be divided into infinitely small elements, whose direc-
tions are parallel to the axis, the centrifugal force of each
element will be equal to the mass of the element into the
square of its velbcity, divided by its distance from the axis.
If a plane be passed through the centre of gravity of the body,
perpendicular to the axis, we may, without impairing the
generality, of the result, suppose the mass of each element
concentrated at the point in which this plane cuts. the line of
direction of the element.
Let XOY be the plane through the centre of gravity per-
pendicular to the axis of revolution, AB the projection of the
body on the plane, and C the point in
which it cuts the axis. Take G as the . ^ ..^
origin of a system of rectangular co-ordi-
nates ; let GX be the axis of X, GY the
axis of Y, and m be the point at which
the mass of one filament is concentrated,
and denote that mass by m. Denote the
co-ordinates of to by « and y, its distance ^' '
from G by r, and its velocity by v. The
centrifugal force of the mass, m (Eq. 196), is equal to
mr (t)^.
Let this force be resolved into components parallel to GX
and GY. We have, for these components,
inr u? cos m GX, and mr to^ sin m GX. ■
197.] CENTBIFUGAL FORCE. — MOMENT OE IKEETIA. 169
But, from the figure,
cos m OX = - , and sin m GX = - .
r r
Substituting these in the preceding expressions, and reduc-
ing, we have, for the components, ~
mx o)', and my <^.
Similar erpressions may be deduced for each of the other
filaments. If we denote the resultant of the components
parallel to OX by X, and of those parallel to GY by Y, we
haye,
X = 2 {mx) Gj8, and F = S {my) u\
If we denote the mass of the body by M, and suppose it
concentrated at its centre of gravity, 0, whose co-ordinates
are x^, and yi, and whose distance from G is Vi, we shall have,
from the principle of the centre of gravity (Art. 37),
S (mx) = Jfoj, and S (my) = Myi.
Substituting above, we have,
X = M<^Xi, and Y = Mufiji.
If we denote the resultant force by R, we have.
B = VX^ + Y^ — Mofi Vxf+Y^ = Mu?r^ (197)
The direction of the resultant R, Eq. (9), is given by the
equations,
X Xt, . Y yi ,^nQ,
cosa=-g- = -; .sma = -^ = J^; (198)
that is, the resultant passes through G.
1
IC
170 MECHANICS.
But equations (197) and (198) are expressions for the
intensity of the centrifugal force of the mass M concentrated
at 0.
Hence, the centrifugal force of an extended mass,
constrained to revolve about a fixed axis, is the same as
though the mass were concentrated at its centre of
gravity.
Experimental lUustratious.
136> The principles relating to centrifugal force admit of
experimental illustration. The instrument represented in
the figure may be employed to show
the value of the centrifugal force. „ E D
^ is a vertical axle, on which is
mounted a wheel, F, communicating
with a train of wheelwork, by means
of which the axle may be made to
revolve with any angular velocity. Fig. ni.
At the upper end of the axle is a
forked branch, BO, sustaining a stretched wire. D and E
are balls pierced by the wire, and free to move along it. Be-
tween B and ^ is a spiral spring, whose axis coincides with
the wire.
Immediately below the spring, on the horizontal part of
the fork, is a scale for determining the distance of the ball,
E, from the axis, and for measuring the degree of compres-
sion of the spring. Before using the instrument, the force
required to produce any degree of compression of the spring
is determined experimentally, and marked on the scale.
If a motion of rotation be communicated to the axis, the
ball D will at once recede to G, but the ball E will be re-
strained by the spring. As the velocity of rotation increases,
the spring is compressed more and more, and the ball E ap-
proaches B. By a sujta|3le arrangement of wheelwork, the
3CF
CENTEIFUGAL FOECE. — MOMENT OF INERTIA. 171
angular velocity of the axis corresponding to any compression
may be ascertained. "We have, therefore, all the data neces-
sary to verify the la^c of centrifugal force.
If a circular hoop of flexible material be mounted on one of
its diameters, its lower point being fastened to the horizontal
beam, and a motion of rotation imparted, the portions of the
hoop farthest from the axis will be most affected by centrif-
ugal force, and the hoop will assume an elliptical form.
If a sponge, filled with water, be attached to one of the
arms of a whirling machine, and motion of rotation im-
parted, the water will be thrown from the sponge. This
principle has been used for drying clothes. An annular
trough of copper is mounted on an axis by radial arms, and-
the axis connected with a train of wheelwork, by means of
which it may be put in motion. The outer wall of the
trough is pierced with holes for the escape of water, and a lid
confines the articles to be dried. To use this instrument,
the linen, after being washed, is placed in the annular space,
and a rapid rotation imparted to the machine. The linen is
thrown against the outer wall of the instrument, and the
water, urged by the centrifugal force, escapes through the
holes. Sometimes as many as 1,500 revolutions per minute
are given to the drying machine, in which case, the drying
process is very rapid and very perfect.
If a body revolve with sufiicient velocity, it may happen
that the centrifugal force generated will be greater than the
force of cohesion that binds the particles together, and
the body be torn asunder. It is a common occurrence for
large grindstones, when put into rapid rotation, to burst, the
fragments being thrown away from the axis, and often pro-
ducing much destruction.
When a wagon, or carriage, is driven round a corner, or is
forced to run on a circular track, the centrifugal force is
often suflBcient to throw loose articles from the vehicle, and
173 MECHANICS.
even to overthrow the vehicle itself. When a car on a rail-
road track is forced to turn a sharp curve, the centrifugal
force throws the cars against the rail, producing a great
amount of friction. To obviate this diflEiculty, it is customary
to raise the outer rail, so that the resultant of the centrifugal
force, and the force of gravity, shall be perpendicular to the
plane of the rails.
Form of the Surface of a Revolving Liquid.
IST. If a vessel of water be made to revolve about a verti-
cal axis, the inner particles recede from the axis on account
of the centrifugal force, and are heaped up about the sides of
the vessel, imparting a concave form to the upper surface.
The concavity becomes greater as the angular velocity is in-
creased.
To determine the form of the concave surface, we assume
the principle yet to be demonstrated, viz. : that the resultant
action on any point of the free surface
is normal to that surface. Let the
figure represent a section made by a
plane through the axis of rotation sup-
posed vertical. Let BA G be the section
of the upper surface of the water, A its
lowest point, and P any other point.
Take A as the origin of co-ordinates, the
axis of Y being vertical, and the axis of X horizontal, and
denote the co-ordinates of P by a; and y.
The material point P is urged horizontally by the centrif-
ugal force Pf, whose acceleration (Eq. 196) is equal to kw^
and it is urged downward by the force of gravity Pg, whose
acceleration is g. The resultant of these forces, PR, is, from
what precedes, normal to the curve APG. Because Pf is
perpendicular to A Y, and PR to the tangent PT, the angle
fPR is equal to YTP ; but the tangent of fPR is equal to
199.] CENTRIFUGAL FORCE. — MOMENT OF INERTIA. 173
-^, and the tangent of VTP is (Calc, p. 13) equal to
-T-- Equating these values and clearing of fractions, we
have.
u)^x dz = g dy.
(199)
Integrating (199), observing that the arbitrary constant
under the given conditions is 0, we have.
u'x
^9.
j-=gy, or x-^ = -^,x, (200)
which is the equation of a parabola whose axis coincides with
the axis of revolution.
Hence, the surface is a paraboloid of revolution whose
axis is the axis of revolution.
Centrifugal Force at Points of the Earth's Surface.
138. Let it be required to determine the centrifugal force
at different points of the earth's surface, due to rotation on
its axis.
Suppose the earth spherical. Let ^ be a point on the sur-
face, PQP' a meridian section
through A, PP' the axis, RQ
the equator, and AB, perpen-
dicular to PP', the radius of the
parallel of latitude through nf.
A. Denote the radius of the
earth by r, the radius of the par-
allel through A by r', and the
latitude of A, or the angle QGA,
by I. The time of revolution
being the same for every point on the earth's surface, the
velocities of Q and A will be to each other as their distances
174 MECHANICS. [801.
from the axis. Denoting these velocities by v and v', we
have,
V •.v' :: r : r',
whence,
, _ w'
~~ r
But from the right-angled triangle, GAB, since the angle
at A is equal to I, we have,
r' ^ r cos I.
Substituting this value of r' in the value of v', and re-
ducing, we have,
■ v' = V cos I.
If we denote the centrifugal force at the equator by/, we
have,
f=- (301)
In like manner, if we denote the centrifugal force at A by
/', we have,
f -"Hi
J - r''
Substituting for v' and r' their values, previously deduced,
we get,
r = t^ (202)
Combining equations (201) and (202), we find,
f:f':: 1 : cos I, .: /' =/cos I (203)
That is, the centrifugal force at any point on the
earth's surface, is equal to the centrifugal force at the
equator, multiplied by the cosine of the latitude.
204.] CEUTEIFUGAL FOECE. — MOMENT OF IKEETIA. 175
Let AE, perpendicular to PP' , represent /', and resolve
it into two components, one tangential, and the other normal
to the meridian section. Prolong GA, and draw AT) perpen-
dicular to it at ^. Complete the rectangle FD on ^^ as a
diagonal. Then will AD be the tangential and AF the nor-
mal component. In the right-angled triangle, AFE, the
angle at A is equal to I. Hence,
FE= AD = f sinl = f Gosl sinl = ^^^ (304)
AF = /' cosl =/ cos2 1 (205)
From (304), we see that the tangential component is at
the equator, goes on increasing till I = 45°, where it is a
maximum, and then goes on decreasing till the latitude is 90%
when it again becomes 0.
The effect of the tangential component is to heap up the
particles of the earth about the equator, and, were the earth
in a fluid state, this process would go on till the effect of the
tangential component was counterbalanced by the component
of gravity acting down the inclined plane thus formed, when
the particles would be in equilibrium.
The higher analysis shows that the form of equilibrium is
that of an oblate spheroid, differing but slightly from that
which our globe is found to possess by actual measurement.
Prom equation (205), we see that the normal component of
the centrifugal force varies as the square of the cosine of the
latitude.
This component is directly opposed to gravity, and, conse-
quently, tends to diminish the apparent weight of all
bodies on the surface of the earth. The value of this com-
ponent is greatest at the equator, and diminishes toward the
poles, where it is 0. Prom the action of the normal compo-
nent of the centrifugal force, and because the flattened form
176 MECHASriCS.
of the earth due to the tangential component brings the polar
regions nearer the centre of the earth, the measured force of
gravity ought to increase in passing from the equator toward
the poles. This is found to be the case.
The radius of the earth at the equator is about 3962.8
miles, which, multiplied by Stt, will give the entire circumfer-
ence of the equator. If this be divided by the number of
seconds in a day, 86,400, we find the value of v. Substituting
this value of v and that of r just given, in equation (301), we
find,
/ = 0.1113/i!.,
for the centrifugal force at the equator. If this be multi-
plied by the square of the cosine of the latitude of any place,
we have the value of the normal component of the centrifugal
force at that place.
If the earth were to revolve 17 times as rapidly as it now
does, the centrifugal force at the equator would be equal to
0. 1112 /i. X 289, or to 32.1368/^., that is, the centrifugal
force at the equator would be very nearly equal to cf. In that
case, the apparent weight of a body at the equator would be
equal to 0.
Elevation of the Outer Rail of a Curved Track.
1S9. To find the elevation of the outer rail, so that the
resultant of the weight and cen-
trifugal force shall be perpendic- "fflT
ular to the line joining the rails, /"^^N,
assume a cross section through f 1
the centre of gravity, G. Take 1 ga \(h
the horizontal, GA, to represent riu |I-:^\\
the centrifugal force, and GB \y '\ %
to represent gravity. Construct ^. g j
their resultant, GO. Then must Fig. ii4.
DU be perpendicular to GC.
308.] CENTRIFUGAL FORCE. — MOMENT OF INERTIA. 177
Denote the velocity of the car by v, the radius of the curved
track by r, the force of gravity by g, and the angle, DBF, or
its equal, £GO,hj «. From the right-angled triangle, GBC,
we have,
BO
tan« = -^.
But BO, -ffhieh is equivalent to GA, is equal to — , and GB is
equal to g ; hence,
. If'
tan cc ^ —.
gr
Denoting the distance between the rails, by d, and the
elevation of the outer rail above the inner one, by h, we have,
tana == -^, very nearly.
Equating the two values of tan a, we have,
1 = ^, ,.h = d^ (206)
a gr gr ^ '
Hence, the elevation of the outer rail varies as the square
of the velocity directly, and as the radius of the curve in-
versely.
It is obvious that the elevation ought to be different for
different velocities, which, from the nature of the case, is im-
possible. The correction is, therefore, made for some assumed
velocity, and then such a form is given to the tire of the
wheels as to partially correct for other velocities.
The Conical Pendulum.
130. A conical pendulum consists of a solid ball at-
tached to one end of a rod, the other end of which is con-
nected, by means of a hinge-joint, with a vertical axle.
178 MECHANICS. [aOT-
When the axle is put in motion, the centrifugal force gener-
ated in the ball causes it to recede from the axis, until an
equilibrium is established between the weight of the ball, the
centrifugal force, and the tension of the connecting rod.
When the Telocity is constant, the centrifugal force will be
constant, and the centre of the ball will describe a horizontal
circle, whose radius will depend upon the velocity. Let it be
required to determine the time of revolution.
Let BD be the vertical axis, A the ball, B the hinge-joint,
and AB the connecting rod, whose mass is
so small, that it may be neglected, in compar-
ison with that of the ball.
Denote the required time of revolution, by
t, the length of the arm, by I, the accelera-
tion due to the centrifugal force, by /, and
the angle ABG, by (p. Draw AG perpen-
dicular to BD, and denote AG, bv r, and ''
' ■' ' Ym 115
BG, by h. ^
From the triangle, ABG, we have, r ^h tan )= sin (/>•
We have, therefore,
g : f :: cos : sin 0, .•. f — g tan 0.
Equating these values of/, we have,
Arr% tan
Hence,
Solving with respect to t,
=: g tan 0.
(208)
That is, the time of revolution, is equal to the time of
a double vibration of a pendulum, whose length is h.
The Governor.
131. The principle of the conical pendulum is employed
in the governor, a machine attached to engines, to regulate
the supply of motive force.
AB is a vertical axis connected with
the machine near its working-point, and
and revolving with a velocity propor-
tional to that of the working-point; FU
and GB are arms turning about AB,
and bearing heavy balls, D and F, at
their extremities ; these bars are united
by hinge- joints with two other bars at
G and F, and also to a ring at H, that
is free to slide up and down the shaft.
180 MECHANICS.
The ring, H, is connected with a lever, HE^, that acts on
the throttle valve in the pipe that admits steam to the
cylinder.
"When the shaft revolves, the centrifugal force causes the
halls to recede from the axis, and the ring, H, is depressed ;
and when the velocity has become sufficiently great, the lever
closes the valve. If the velocity slackens, the balls approach
the axis, and the ring, H, ascends, opening the valve. In
any given case, if we know the velocity required at the work-
ing-point, we can compute the required angular velocity of
the shaft, and, consequently, the value of t. This value of
t, substituted in equation (308), gives the value of h. We
may, therefore, properly adjust the ring, and the lever, HK.
Examples.
1. A ball weighing 10 lbs. is ■whirled round in a circle whose radius is
10 feet, with a velocity of 30 feet. What is the acceleration due to
centrifugal force? Ana. 90 ft.
3. In the preceding example, what is the tension on the cord that re-
strains the ball? Ans. < = 38 lbs., nearly.
3. A body is whirled round in a circular path whose radius is 5 feet,
and the centrifugal force is equal to the weight of the body. What is
the velocity of the moving body? Ans. v = 12.7 ft.
4. In how many seconds must the earth revolve that the centrifugal
force at the equator may counterbalance the force of gravity, the radius
of the equator being 8963.8 miles? Ans. t = 5,068 sees.
5. A body is placed on a horizontal plane, which is made to revolve
about a vertical axis, with an angular velocity of 3 feet. How far must
the body be situated from the axis that it may be on the point of sliding
outward, the coefficient of friction between the body and plane being
equal to .6? Ans. r = 4.835 ft.
6. What must be the elevation of the outer rail of a track, the radius
being 3960 ft., the distance between the rails 5 feet, and the velocity of
the car 30 miles per hour, that there may be no lateral thrust?
Ans. 0.076 ft., or O.d in., nearly.
7. The distance between the rails is 5 feet, the radius of the curve
600 feet, and the height of the centre of gravity of the car 5 feet. What
209.] CENTRIFUGAL FORCE. — MOMENT OF INERTIA. 181
velocity must the car have that it may be on the point of being over-
turned by the centrifugal force, the rails being on the same level?
Ans. v = 9S ft., or 66f miles per hour.
8. A body revolves uniformly in a circle whose radius is 5 ft., and
with such a velocity as to complete a revolution in 5 seconds. What is
the acceleration due to the centripetal force? Ans. Jtt'^
9. A body weighing 1 lb., is whirled around horizontally, being re-
tained by a string, whose length is 6 feet. What is the time of revolu-
tion when the tension of the string is 3 lbs. ? Ans. Sir Vf seconds.
Moment of Inertia.
133. The moment of inertia of a body with respect to
an axis, is the algebraic sum of the products obtained by
multiplying the mass of each element of the body by the
square of its distance from the axis. Denoting the moment
of inertia with respect to any axis by K, the mass of any ele-
ment of the body by m, and its distance from the axis by r,
we hare, from the definition,
X = S (mr^) (309)
If we denote the mass of any element by m and its distance
from the axis by r, the velocity of m when the angular veloc-
ity of the body is 1 will be equal to r and the momentum of
m will be mr : but the particle is moving in a direction that
is perpendicular to r ; hence the moment of the momentum
with respect to the axis is mr^. The algebraic sum of the
moments of the momenta of all the elements of the body will
be equal to S (mr^), which is the expression for the moment
of inertia of the body, that is, the moment of inertia of a
body with respect to any axis is the algebraic sum of
moments of the jnomenta of all its elements, with re-
spect to the same axis, when the body is revolving with
an angular velocity equai to 1.
183 MECHANTCS. 210.]
If we denote the algebraic sum of the moments of the mo-
menta of all the elements of a body by L, the angular velocity
being u>, it is obvious that we shall have,
i = 2 (mr^) Id — Aw (210)
Moment of Inertia with, respect to Parallel Axes.
133. The moment of inertia of a body varies with the po-
sition of the axis with respect to which it is taken.
To investigate the law of variation, let AB
represent any section of the body by a plane
perpendicular to the axis ; C, the point in
which this plane cuts the axis ; and Q, the
c't'a
point in which it cuts a parallel axis through *'
the centre of gravity. Let P be any element of the body,
whose mass is m, and denote PO hj r, PO 'hj s, and CG
by h.
From the triangle GPG, according to a principle of Trig-
onometry, we have,
r-3 = s^ + ^2 — 2sk cos CGP.
Substituting in (309) and separating the terms, we have,
E —1. (ms^) + -2 (m;fc3) _ 22 {msk cos OGP).
Or, since k is constant, and 2 (m) = M, the mass of the
body, we have,
X = 2 (ms^) + MB — 3^2 {ms cos CGP),
But s cos OGP = GH, the lever arm of the mass m, with
respect to the axis through the centre of gravity. Hence,
S {ms cos COP) is the algebraic sum of the moments of all
the particles of the body with respect to the axis through the
311.] CElfTEIFUGAL FOSCE. — MOMENT OF INERTIA. 183
centre of gravity ; but, from the principle of moments, this
is equal to 0. Hence,
K=J. (ms^) + Mh^ (311).
The first term of the second member is the 'moment of
inertia, with respect to the axis through the centre of gravity.
Hence, the moment of inertia of a body with respect
to any axis, is equal to the moment of inertia with re-
spect to a parallel axis through the centre of gravity,
plus the m,ass of the body into the square of the distance
between the two axes.
The moment of inertia for any system of parallel axes is
least possible when the axis passes through the centre of
gravity. If any number of parallel axes be taken at equal
distances from the centre of gravity, the moment of inertia
with respect to each will be the same.
Equation (311) enables us to find the moment of inertia
with respect to any axis when we know the moment of iner-
tia with respect to any parallel axis. If the first axis does not
pass through the centre of gravity of th6 body, we pass to a
parallel axis by diniinishing the given moment of inertia by
Mk^ ; we then pass to the second axis by increasing the last
result by Mk'^; k and k' are the distances from the first
and second axes respectively, to the parallel axis through the
centre of gravity of the body.
Polar Moment of a Plane Surface.
134. The polar moment of inertia is the moment of
inertia of a plane surface with respect to an axis perpendic-
ular to the plane.
184
MECHANICS.
[212.
Let A GBD be any plane area, and
the point in which it cuts an axis per-
pendicular to it : through draw any
two rectangular axes, OX and OY.
Let m be an infinitesimal element whose
co-ordinates are x and y, and whose dis-
tance from is r. Then will the polar
moment of inertia of the area be given
by the equation,
A' = 2 {mr'^'). . . .
Kg. 118.
(212)
But, r^ = 2/2 + a;^ : substituting in (213) and separating
the terms, we hare,
/r = S [mf) + S (mx^).
(213)
The first term of the second member of (213) is the mo-
ment of inertia of the given area with respect to the axis of
X, and the second term is its moment of inertia with respect
to the axis of T; denoting the former by Z, and the latter by
/„, we have.
K=I, + ly.
(314)
Hence, the polar moment of inertia of a plane area is
equal to the sum of the moments of inertia of the area
with respect tn any two rectangular axes in the plane of
the area passing through the foot of the polar axis.
Experimental Determiuation of Homent of Inertia.
135. When a body can be handled conveniently, its mo-
ment of inertia may be found experimentally as follows :
Make the axis horizontal, and allow the body to vibrate about
it, as a compound pendulum. Find the time of a single vi-
bration, and denote it by t. This value of t, in equation
215.] CENTRIFUGAL FOKCB. — MOMENT OF INEETIA. 185
(184), makes known the value of I. Determine the centre of
gravity, and denote its distance from the axis by h. Find
the mass of the body, and denote it by M.
We have, from equation (190),
Mkl — S (mr^) — K. (315)
Substitute for M, I, and h, the values already found, and the
value of K will be the moment of inertia, with respect to the
assumed axis. Subtract from this the value of Mk"^, and the
remainder will be the moment of inertia with respect to a
parallel axis through the centre of gravity.
When a body is homogeneous and of regular figure, its
moment of inertia is most readily found by means of the cal-
culus.
To make formula (209) suitable to the application of the
calculus, we have simply to change the sign of summation, S,
to that of integration, /, and to replace m by dM and r by x.
This gives,
E = fxHM (216)
Moment of Inertia of a Straight Line.
136. Let AB represent a physical straight line, G its
centre of gravity, and E any ele-
ment limited by planes at right
angles to its length and infinitely
near to each other. Denote the
mass of the line by M, -its length by
11, the distance GE by x, and the
length of the element by dx ; also denote the mass of the
element by dM: we shall then have,
Mdx
M : dM :: 21 : dx, or, dM = -^^— ;
D
n?
R
1
G E
Fig.
C
119.
186 MECHAKICS. [317.
Substituting this in (216), and taking the integral between
the limits — I and -\-l, we have.
That is, the moment of inertia of a right line with
respect to a perpendicular axis through its centre of
gravity is equal to the mass of the line multiplied by
one third of the square of half its length.
For a parallel axis whose distance from G is d, the moment
of inertia being denoted by K', we have,
E' ^ Jf^lV^a) (218)
For a parallel axis through the end of the line we have d^^l,
and (318) becomes,
E' = m{^^ + A='^MP (319)
Formulas (317), (318), and (319) are entirely independent
of the breadth of the filament AB : they will therefore hold
good when the filament is replaced by the rectangle EF. In
this case M represents the mass of the rectangle, 21 is its
length, and d is the distance of the centre of gravity of the
rectangle from an axis parallel to one of its ends.
Moment of Inertia of a Thin Circular Plate.
137. In the_^rs^ place, let us find the polar moment of in-
ertia, the axis being perpendicular to the plane of the circle
at its centre. From the centre with a radius x describe a
circle, and again with the radius x + dx describe a concentric
circle; all points of the included ring are equally distant
aaO.] CBNTBIFUGAL FOECE.— MOMENT OF IKEKTIA. 187
from the axis, and consequently its moment of inertia is
equal to its mass multiplied by the square
of X. Denoting the mass of the circle by /-"^
M and the mass of the elementary ring by
dM, we have, i ,,• y
M : dM : : -nr^ : 2-nx dx,
from -which we deduce, ^'
Mg. ISO.
,,, M ^ , %M ,
dM = — 5 x2TTxdx = — =-« dx.
Substituting in (316), and integrating between the limits
X = and a; = r, we have,
2M /»'■ Mr^
For a parallel axis at a distance d from the axis through
the centre, we have,
X' = m(^ + d^) (331)
In the second place, to find the moment of inertia of a circle
with respect to any diameter, we observe that the moment of
inertia is the same for all diameters ; hence, from (314), we
have,
Mt^
K=^ (333)
And for a parallel axis at the distance d,
K' = if(J + ^') (333)
188
MECHANICS.
[224.
To find the moment of inertia of a cir-
cular ring with reference to an axis perpen-
dicular to the plane of the ring through
its centre, we integrate (220) between the
limits r' and r, r' being the inner radius of
the ring and r the outer one. In this case,
we have,
2if/r* r\ M
Fig. 121.
K-.
r^ \4
) = ^,ir^-r"){r^ + r'') [a)
in which M is the mass of the outer circle. If we denote the
mass of the ring by M', we have,
M : M'
V^ . T'™
M
or — s =
M'
Substituting in (a), and reducing, we have.
For a parallel axis, we have.
(334)
Kz= M
i-
3
d^\
(335)
It is to be noted that the preceding expressions are entirely
independent of the thickness of the circular plate ; hence,
they are- applicable to cylinders of any length (either solid or
hollow), when their axes are parallel to the axis of rotation.
Let the student solve the same problem, using polar co-ordinates.
Moment of Inertia of any Solid of Revolution.
138. Let PA Q be the meridian section of a solid of revolu-
tion, and take the axis OX of the solid as the axis of X. Let
226.]
CENTEIFUGAL FORCE. — MOMENT OF INEETIA.
189
OZ, perpendicular to OX, be the axis^ with respect to which
the moment of inertia is to be found.
At a distance x from the origin pass a plane
PQ perpendicular to OX, and at a distance
X + dz pass a parallel plane. These planes
will include an elementary slice of the solid
whose volume is ny^dx, y being the ordinate
of the meridian curve corresponding to the
abscissa x. If we denote the entire volume
by V, its mass by M, and the mass of the slice
by dM, we have,
■nM
M : dM : : F : mfdx, or dM -.
V
yMx.
The moment of inertia of the slice with respect to OZ, may
be found from Equation (223), by making M = dM, r = y,
and d=-x: calling this moment of inertia dK, we have,
dK .
nM jty
Whence, by integration.
dx.
(226)
the limits being taken to include the entire body.
Moment of Inertia of a Cylinder.
139. Let the axis of the cylinder coincide with the axis of
X, and let the axis OZ be taken through
the centre of gravity of the cylinder ; de-
note the length of the cylinder by 2Z, and
the radius of its cross section by r.
Then will y = r, and V = 2-iTrH : sub-
stituting in (226), and integrating between
the limits — I and -|- I, we have.
ID
Fig. 128.
190 MECHANICS. [aa?-
Fot an axis parallel to CD, we have,
X- = M^l + l+d^ (328)
Moment of Inertia of a Cone.
140. Let the axis of the cone coincide with the axis of X,
and let OZ be perpendicular to it at the vertex of the cone ;
denote the height of the cone by h, the radius of its base by
r, and its mass by M.
T 1 . .
We shall have y ■= jx, and V = -nr% : substituting, in
(226), and taking the integral between the limits and /*, we
have.
To find the moment of inertia when OZ passes through
the centre of gravity of the cone, we subtract from (239) the
/3 \'
quantity M x yjhj , whence,
"^ = ^S'^ + ¥ - re^^^ = lA' - 't^ ^'''^
Moment of Inertia of a Sphere.
141. Let the axis of X be taken to coincide with a diame-
ter of the sphere, and let the axis of Z be perpendicular to it
at its left hand extremity ; denote the radius of the sphere
by r, and its mass by M.
4
"We shall then have, y^ = %rx — «', and F = ^-nr^ ; substi-
231.] CENTRIFUGAL FORCE. — MOMENT OF INERTIA. 191
tuting, in (226), and taking the integral between the limits
and %r, we have,
3Jf r^l^iM — ^rofi + x^ „ , A ,
or.
ZM r^l 3 \ 7
^= Wo V'''' + '■'^ - -^y"" = r^'" (^^1)
Por a parallel axis through the centre we subtract, from
(231), the quantity, Mr"^, which gives,
K' =^-Mr^ (232)
The origin might have been taken at the centre in the first
place, in which case we should at once have deduced equa-
tion (232), from which we readily deduce equation (231).
Moment of Inertia of a Solid with Respect to Its Axis.
143. Recurring to Article 138, let us suppose the circular
slice, PQ, to revolve around the axis OX: its moment of
inertia, which is the differential of the moment of inertia of
the solid with respect to OX, may be. found, from (220), by
making r z:^ y, and M equal to the mass of the slice. Art.
138 ; making these substitutions, and calling the result dK,
we have,
dK=-Y ■ ^dx.
Whence, by integration,
K^'^fy^dx (233) ■
In which y is the ordinate of the meridian curve.
192 MECHANICS. [234.
Moment of Inertia of a Cylinder.
143. To find the moment of inertia of a cylinder with respect
to its axis, we assume the co-ordinate axes, as in Art. 139.
"We then have, V = ttt^ x 2Z and y ■=r. Substituting, in
(233), and integrating from — Z to + Z, we haye,
^=WJ-1 ^^- = ^^' (234)
a result that corresponds with (220).
Moment of Inertia of a Cone.
144. Assume the position of the axis, and the notation of
1 r
Art. 140. "We then have V = gWr^A, and y — ^x: substitut-
ing, in (233), and taking the integral between the limits and
li, we have,
2 r%
/>A ^4 3
Moment of Inertia of a Sphere.
145. Let the axis OX be a diameter of the sphere, and let
OZ be perpendicular to it at its left hand extremity. If we
4
assume the notation already employed, we have, V = ^Trr'j
O
and 2/2 = 2rx — x^ ; substituting, in (233), taking the inte-
gral between the limits and 2r, we have,
3 M r^ 2
^ = 8 ^/o (^'■'^ ~ ^'■^ + oi^)dxz= ~Mr% (236)
which corresponds to equation (232).
237.] CENTRIFtTGAL POECE. MOMENT OE INEETIA.
193
Moment of Inertia with Bespect to Axis of Symmetry.
146. Let APBQ be an ellipse, AB its transverse, and CD
its conjugate axis. Let the origin
of co-ordinates be taken at tbe
centre 0; at a distance from
equal to x, draw a double ordinate,
PQ, and at a distance, x + dx,
draw a parallel double ordinate :
the area of the included filament
is equal to 'iydx ; denoting the
mass of this filament by dM, that
of the ellipse being denoted by M,
and calling the semi-axes of the curye a and h, we hare.
M : dM : : nab : 2ydx, or
2Mydx
nab
(237)
The moment of inertia ot PQ with respect to the axis
AB, which is the differential of the entire moment of inertia,
is given by Equation (217), by making M equal to the value
of dM, Eq. 337, and I = y. Substituting these values, and
integrating, we have.
K^
%M
Znab
I y^dx
(238)
From the equation of the ellipse, referred to its centre, we
have,
y^Ua^-x^)^.
Substituting in (338), reducing, and taking the integral
between the limits — a and -|- a, we have.
3 Mb^ /»+ " 1
3 nd^J -a
(239)
194 MECHANICS. [240.
Applying formula B twice, and completing the integration
by the sine formula, Calc, p. 107, we finally obtain
E=:^Mb^ (240)
In like manner, with respect to the conjugate axis, we find
• the moment of inertia to be
K-:^Ma^ (241)
By a siinilar course of investigation we can find the moment
of inertia of any plane area with respect to an axis of sym-
metry.
Centre and Radius of Gyration.
147. The centre of gyration of a body with reference to
any axis is a point lying on a perpendicular to this axis
through the centre of gravity, such that if the entire mass of
the body were concentrated at it, its moment of inertia
would not be changed. The distance from the centre of gy-
ration to the axis is called the radius of gyration.
Let M denote the mass of the body, and Ji its radius of gy-
ration ; then will the moment of inertia of the concentrated
mass, with respect to the axis, be equal to M.W ; but this
must, by definition, be equal to the moment of inertia of the
body with respect to the same axis, or to S {mr^) ; hence.
MJfi = 2 {mr% or A = \/^-^- (342)
Hence, to find the radius of gyration with respect to
an axis, we divide its moment of inertia with respect to
that axis, by the mass, and then extract the square root
of the result.
Since M is constant for the same body, it follows that the
radius of gyration will he the least possible when the mOPient
343.1 CENTRIFUGAL POECE. MOMENT OF INERTIA. 195
of inertia is the least possible, tliat is, when the axis passes
through the centre of gravity. This minimum radius is
called the principal radius of gyration. If we denote the
principal radius of gyration by h^, we shall hare, for the
straight line.
1hz=~, and A = \/| + d^, (343)
'I
V3' """^ '""V3
and in like manner we may treat the other magnitudes that
have been considered.
The straight line through the centre of gyration parallel to
the axis with reference to which the centre of inertia is taken,
is sometimes called the axis of gyration. If this line be
revolved around the axis of rotation of the body, it will gener-
ate a cylinder ; if the mass of the body be concentrated in any
manner on the surface of this cylinder, its moment of inertia
will not be changed.
In a compound pendulum, the centre of gravity, the centre
of oscillation, and the centre of gyration, all lie on the same
straight line ; the last of these points lies between the other
two. Equation (190) may be written
1 = ^=^, or U = h\ or h=VM (344)
Hence, A is a mean proportional between Jc and I. When
any two of these quantities are given, the other one may be
found by geometrical construction.
VII.— WOEK AND ENEEGY.— IMPACT.
Relation Between Work and Energy.
148. The terms -work and energy are defined in Article
9. From that article and from Article 33 we see that the
elementary quantity of work of a force is measured by the
intensity of the force multiplied by the projection of the
elementary path of its point of application on the direction
of the force.
Let a force P be exerted on a free body whose mass is m,
and suppose that the point of application passes over a dis-
tance k in the element of time dt. Let the distance 1c be
projected on F, and denote the projection by ds. If we de-
note the elementary quantity of work by dQ, we shall have,
dQ = Fds.
But in this case we have, from Art. 92,
^^""dt^-
Substituting this value of F in the preceding equation, we
have,
d^ d' , Q is positive and work is stored up ; if 6" < 6',
Q is negative, and the wheel gives out work.
If the angular velocity increase from 6' to 6", and then de-
crease to 6', and so on, alternately, the work accumulated
during the first part of each cycle is given out during the
second part, and any device that will make 6' and 6" more
nearly equal, will contribute toward equalizing the motion of
the machine. By suitably increasing the mass and radius of
gyration, their difference may be made as small as desirable.
Let the half-sum of the greatest and least angular velocities
be called the mean angular velocity, and denote it by 6'".
all 1 Qi
We shall have — ~ — = 6'", and by factoring the second
member of (258), we have,
Q = iMk^ ((9" + 6') {e" - e') ;
whence, by substituting the value of 6" -f 6',
Q = Mk^ {9" — e') 6'" (259)
Let us suppose the difference between the greatest and
260.] WORK AND ENERGY. — IMPACT. 209
least velocity, equal to the n^ part of their mean, that is,
that
ft"'
6" _ e' = — .
n
This, in (359), gives
« = ^-', or, «. = !«,....«
From this equation the moment of inertia of the wheel may
be found, when we know n, Q, and 0'". The value of n may
be assumed ; for most kinds of work a value of from 6 to 10
will be found to give sufficient .uniformity ; the value of 0'"
depends on the character of the work to be performed, and Q
is made known by the character of the motion to be regu-
lated.
To find the value of Q in any practical case we must find
the quantity of work that is stored up in the first part of the
cycle, which is also the quantity given out in the second part
of the cycle. The method of proceeding is best illustrated
by a practical example.
The Crank and Crank Motion.
158. A crank is a device for converting reciprocating
motion into rotary motion, or the reverse.
In the diagram, DG represents a reciprocating piece,
that is, a piece that moves back-
ward and forward being re- .^'^^~^
strained by suitable guides, as Pn n 9,g g^fx--^--^-F
is the case with the piston rod ~° ° ^\^ ■*■ J
in a locomotive ; OB is a con- p. j^_ " '
necting rod having a hinge
Joint at G and connected with AB loy means of a short axle
called the crank pin ; AB is the crank arm solidly con-
nected with an axle;tvhich is perpendicular to the plane GBA,
and which is called the crank axis.
210 MECHANICS.
When the crank pin is at E the reciprocating piece is at
one limit of its play, and when the crank pin is at F the re-
ciprocating piece is at the other limit of its play. The dis-
tance EF, which is equal to twice the length of the crank
arm, is called the throTV of the crank ; it measures the dis-
tance through which the reciprocating motion of OD takes
place.
If we suppose a force P to act along DC, either pushing or
pulling, it will have no tendency to produce rotation of the
crank when the crank pin is either at ^or i?'; these points
are therefore called dead points. "When the crank pin is
at any other point, P will tend to produce rotation, the meas-
ure of the tendency being equal to the component of P in the
direction of BG, multiplied ly the perpendicular distance
from A to this direction.
If we suppose P to be constant, its component in the direc-
tion of -BC will be variable, and it is obvious that the varia-
tion will increase with the obliquity oi BG to GD. For this
reason the connecting rod should be made as long as the
nature of the mechanism will permit ; when it is 10 or 13
times as long as the crank arm, we may, in. most practical
cases, regard the component along BG as constant, and as
acting parallel to GD. We shall so regard it in the follow-
ing discussion.
We may suppose the force P to act in one direction, say in
the direction from Gto I) ; or we may suppose it to act alter-
nately in the directions from G to D and from D to G. In
the former case the crank is said to be a crank of single
action, and in the latter case it is a crank of double ac-
tion.
We have an example of the former in the ordinary lathe
where the force applied to the treadle only acts downward ;
we have an example of the latter in the locomotive where the
force of the steam acts alternately in both directions.
261.]
WOEK AND ENEEGT. — IMPACT.
211
Fly-Wheels to Regulate Crank Motion.
159. To compute the dimensions of a fly-wheel to regulate
crank motion, let us first consider the case of a crank of sin-
gle action.
Let us take the connecting rod so
long that it may, in all positions, he
regarded as sensibly parallel to the re-
ciprocating piece, which is supposed
to lie in the direction ITK, and sup-
pose the force P to act downward only,
and through a distance equal to ILK,
the diameter of the circle HGK de-
scribed by the crank pin. Suppose the
resistance overcome to be constant and equal in effect to a
force Q acting with a lever arm 1. Denote the length of the
crank arm by r.
The work of P in one revolution is equal to P x 3r, and
the work of Q in the same period is ^ x ^tt ; these are, by
hypothesis, equal to each other, that is.
ZnQ = %Pr, or -£ = -
Pr n
(261)
When the crank pin is at IT, the moment of P is ; as the
crank pin advances in its path, RGB, the moment of P in-
creases, being equal io P •>(. AM. As long 2& P y. AM <,
§ X 1, the work of the power is less than the work of the
resistance ; when P x AM = § x 1, the work of the power
is equal to the work of the resistance ; and when P x -3/^ >
§ X 1, the work of the power is greater than the work of the
resistance. In the last case the excess of work of the power
is being stored up in the fly-wheel which is supposed to be
mounted on the crank axis.
213 MECHANICS. [362.
To find the position of the crank arm when work begins to
be stored up, make
AM O
P X AM= Qxl, whence ^- = ;^^ (262)
Denoting the corresponding angle EAC by (/>, the first
member of (262) is equal to cos i^, and from (261) the second
member is the reciprocal of n ; hence, we have,
cos = -, or ^ = 71° 27' (263)
Whilst the crank pin is moving over the arc GED, equal to
142° 54', work is being stored up. To find the amount of
work stored up, we observe that the corresponding work of P
is P X OD, or to P X 2?- sin 71° 27', and denoting this work
by W, we have,
W=^P X 2r sin 71° 27' = 2Pr x 0.9480 (264)
The work of Q in the same period, denoted by W, is given
by the equation,
„, „ _ 142° 54'
W =Qx2nx ^gQ^.
Or, because, § x 27r = P x 2r, we have,
W = 2P»- x ^Q^' = 2Pr x 0.3968 ..... (265)
Subtracting (263) from (264), we have, for the amount of
work stored up,
W—W'=z 2Pr [.9480 — .3968] — Pr x 1.1024 .... (266)
Substituting this for Q, in Equation (260), we have,
jf;fc. = !L!iZy^i^4 ^^g^^
u
If we denote the number of revolutions of the crank per
second by iV, the value of 9'" will be 27riV"; this reduces (367)
to the form.
268.1
WOKK AND ENEEGT. — IMPACT.
213
MB:
n X Pr X 1.1024 :
(268)
Poncelet says that a value of n between 7.5 and 10 will
secure a sufl&cient degree of regularity. Making n = 10, and
substituting for n^ its value 9.87, we have finally.
Pr X 11.024
(269)
The first member of (269) is the moment of inertia of the
required fly-wheel, and the second member is its value ; this
latter is completely known from the conditions of the prob-
lem.
We may now assume Jc, the radius of gyration, and com-
pute M; or, we may assume M, or, what is the same thing,
we may assume the weight of the wheel, and compute &. In
either case the problem is completely solved.
Crank of Double Action.
160. Let us next consider a crank of double action, em-
ploying the same notation as before. Let the force P act
downward through the distance, 2r,
and then upward through same dis-
tance ; the quantity of work of P in
an entire revolution of the crank will
then be equal to 4:Pr, and we shall
have, as before,
Pr
iPr=2^Q, or ^ = -
(270)
When the moment of P is equal to
the moment of Q, we have,
P X AM= Q, or —
Pr'
214 MECHANICS. [271.
Whence, by substitution, as before, we have,
cos ^ = - , or ^ = 50° 28' (271)
There will be four points, C, D, Q, and L, at which there
will be an equilibrium between P and Q. In passing from
to D the velocity will increase ; from D to G the velocity will
decrease ; from G to L the velocity will increase again ; and
from L to Cthe velocity will decrease. From Cto D work will
be stored up to be given in passing from D to G, and in passing
from G to L &u equal amount of work will be stored, to be
given out in passing from H to G; that is, there are two
cycles of change in each revolution.
The work stored up in passing from OtoDis given by the
equation,
W— W' = P X2r sin 50° 28' - Q x 2rr ^J^'-
Or, by reduction,
W— W = Pr(1.54 — 1.12) = Pr X 0.42.
Substituting this for Q in (260), and making n = 10, we
have,
Pr X 4:2
MV = ^^-^- (272)
Denoting the number of revolutions per second by N, the
value of 6»"' is 2-nN, which reduces (272) to
Pr X 42
which gives the moment of inertia of the required fly-wheel.
To compare the results in (269) and (273), let us suppose
the work of the power during one revolution to be the same
in both. In this case the value of P in (273) is one half that
274.] WOEK AND ENEEQT.— IMPACT. 315
of P in (269) ; consequently the moment of inertia of the fly-
wheel to regulate single crank action is 11.034: -4- 2.1, or b'^
times that of the fly-wheel to regulate double crank action.
Elasticity. — Impact.
161. Elasticity is that property by virtue of which a
body tends to resume its original form after having been dis-
torted by the action of some force. A body may be distorted
iy compression, by extension, or iy twisting. The force that
acts to change the form of a body may be called the force of
distortion, and the force that tends to restore the body to
its original shape may be called the force of restitution.
If the force of restitution is equal to the force of distortion,
the body is perfectly elastic ; if the force of restitution is 0,
the body is perfectly inelastic. No body is either perfectly
elastic or perfectly inelastic. Ivory, glass, and steel are
among the more elastic bodies ; soft putty and tempered clay
are examples of bodies that are nearly inelastic.
If we denote the force of distortion by d, the force of resti-
tution by r, and their ratio by e, we have,
« =^ (274)
The value of e, which depends upon the molecular action of
the particles of a body, can be taken as a measure of the
body's elasticity ; it may then be called the coefficient of
elasticity.
If one ball impinges upon another a succession of effects
takes place which are dependent upon the molecular constitu-
tion of the two bodies, and in general these effects take place
in an exceedingly short space of time, so that the force ex-
erted may be called impulsive. The first effect of the im-
pact is to produce a compression of both bodies, and this
316 MECHANICS. [27S.
continues until the molecular forces called into action are
sufficient to resist further distortion. The balls, being en-
dowed with a certain degree of elasticity, then tend to recover
their spherical form, and in this effort they exert a further
pressure upon each other, the force of restitution being equal
to e times the force of distortion, (Bq. 274).
Momentum and Velocity.
163. In the case of impact of two spherical balls, A and B,
let us denote the mass of -4 by m and the mass of B by m',
and furthermore let us denote the
velocity of A before impact by v ^/--^^ mjv'
and that of -5 by y', v being greater
than v'. Before collision the aggre-
gate momentum of the two bodies '^^ — ^ ^^
will be equal to mv -f- m'v'. When
collision takes place a mutual pressure P will be set up, the
effect of which will be to diminish the velocity of A and to
increase that of B, and because action and reaction are equal,
the momentum of A will be diminished as much as that of B
is increased, and the same law will continue during the
period of restitution. Hence, the aggregate momentum is not
changed during the period of impact.
Let us assume, as shown in the figure, that the centres of
the balls are moving along the same right line, the velocity of
A being v and that of B being v'. At any time t, before or
after impact, denote the distance of A from a fixed plane, at
right angles to the given direction, by x, and that of B from
the same plane by x': the distance of the centre of gravity of
A and B from the same plane will be given by the equation,
mx + m'x' /„™e\
aJi = ^ — - (375)
m + m ^
At the time t + dt the distance of A from the fixed plane
270-] WORK AND ENEEGT. — IMPACT. 217
will hex + vdt and the distance of B from the same plane
will be x' + v'dt, and the distance of the centre of gravity of
A and B from that plane will be given by the equation,
m + m ^ '
Subtracting (375) from (376), and dividing by dt, we have,
dxi mv + m'v'
dt in + m!
(377)
It has just been shown that the second member of (377),
which represents the aggregate momentum of the two bodies,
is unchanged by the collision; hence, the first member,
which represents the velocity of the centre of gravity, is also
unchanged by the collision.
Direct Central Impact.
163. If the centres of the two balls (Fig. 130) are moving
along the same straight line when the collision takes place, the
impact is said to be direct and central. Let us consider
the direct and central impact of two spheres of the same
material, and let e denote their common coefficient of elas-
ticity.
Denote the mass of the ball A by m, its velocity before im-
pact by V, and its velocity after impact by u ; denote the mass
of the ball B by m', its velocity before impact by v', and its
velocity after impact by u' ; also, denote the common velocity
of the two balls at the instant of greatest compression by w.
The aggregate momentum, or simply the momentum of the
two bodies before impact, is mv -{- m'v', and their momentum
at the instant of maximum compression is {m -f m') w ; but
from Art. 162, these two expressions are equal ; hence,
/ , n , ' r mv + m'v' ,„„_,
(m -f- m) w = mv + mv' or w = ; ,— ■ • ■ • (378)
^^ ' m + m ^
318 MECHANICS. [279-
To find the velocities lost by A and gained by B during the
period of compression, we subtract w from v and v' from w,
giving after reduction,
v — 'w= '^' , (v — v'), (279)
m + m ^ '
«, _ ^,' = _ J!L_ („ _ ^,') (380)
The velocities lost by A and gained by B during the period
of restitution will be equal respectively to the second mem-
bers of (279) and (280), each multiplied by e (Art. 161) :
hence, the total loss of velocity by A, and gain of velocity by
B during the entire impact, will be given by the equation,
v-u={l + 6) —^—,{v - v'), (281)
M - «' = (1 + e) _J?L_ (v _ J,') (282)
The velocities of A and B after collision, found from the
preceding equations by simple transposition, are
m'
« = ^ _ (1 + e) --^,(v - v'), (283)
u' = 4;' + = wzdm cos 0.
But dm cos ^ is equal to the horizontal projection
of dm, in other words it is a horizontal section of a
vertical prism of which dm is the base ; denoting
this cross section by dm', we have,
p' = w%dm' (302)
330 MECHANICS.
If ^ < 90°, p' will be positive, and the pressure will be
downward; if > 90°, p' will be negative, and the pressure
will be upward.
Let figure 134 represent a submerged vertical filament :
from what precedes, we see that it will be pressed downward
by a force that is equal to the weight of a column of the fluid
whose base is the cross-section of the filament and whose alti-
tude is the distance at AB from the free surface ; and it will
be pressed upward by a force that is equal to the weight of a
column of the fluid whose base is the cross-section of the fila-
ment and whose altitude is the distance of UF from the free
surface.
This principle is used hereafter in finding an expression
for the buoyant effect of a fiuid.
Examples.
1. A hollow sphere is filled with a liquid. How does the entire press-
ure, on the interior surface, compare with the weight of the liquid ?
Ans. The pressure is three times the weight of the liquid.
3. A hollow cylinder, with a circular base, is filled with a liquid.
How does the pressure on the interior surface compare with the weight
of the liquid ?
Ans. The pressure is equal to — ; — times the weight of the liquid ;
here h is the height of the cylinder, and r is the radius of its base.
3. A right cone, with a circular base, stands on its base, and is filled
with a liquid. How does the pressure on the internal surface compare
with the weight of the liquid ?
Zr + 2 Vh^ 4- r^
Ans. The pressure equals times the weight of the
liquid ; here h is the altitude, and r the radius of the base.
4. Required the relation between the pressure and the weight in the
preceding case, when the cone stands on its vertex.
Vh^ + r*
Ans. The pressure is times the weight of tht liquid.
MECHANICS OF LIQUIDS. 231
5. What is the pressure on the lateral faces of a cubical vessel filled
with water, the edges of the cube being 4 feet, and the weight of the
water 63^ lbs. per cubic foot ? A.na. 8,000 lbs.
6. A cylindrical vessel is filled with water. The height of the vessel
is 4 feet, and the radius of the base 6 feet. What is the pressure on the
lateral surface ? Ans. 18,850 lbs., nearly.
7. A sluice-gate 10 feet square is placed vertically in the water, its
upper side coinciding with the free surface; what are the respective
pressures on the upper and lower halves, the weight of water being 62^
lbs. per cubic foot ? Ans. 7,812.5 lbs. and 23,437.5 lbs. ■
8. What are the pressures on the two triangles formed by drawing one
diagonal of the gate ? Ans. 10,416f lbs. and 20,838J lbs.
Centre of Pressure.
169. The centre of pressure on a surface is the point
at which the resultant pressure intersects the surface.
Let us consider the case of a submerged plane surface,
ABED, whose prolongation inter-
sects the free surface, XOF, of the
liquid in OX, and whose inclina-
tion to the free surface is equal to
a. Let OJTbe taken as the axis of
X, and let OY, perpendicular to
OX, and lying in the plane of
ABED, be taken as the axis of Y,
the value of y being positive downward.
Let ABED be divided into infinitesimal elements by lines
parallel to OX ; let DB, denoted by dm, be one of these ele-
ments, and denote the co-ordinates of its centre of gravity,
P, by X and y.
The resultant pressure on DB will pass through P, and be-
cause the distance of P below the free surface is equal to
y sin a, the value of this pressure will, be, from (399),
w • y sin a • dm,
232 MECHANICS. [303.
and because it is perpendicular to ABED, its moment with
respect to the axis of X will be
wy^ smadm,
and the sum of the moments of all of the elements with re-
spect to OX will be
w sin « fy^dm (303)
Denote the co-ordinates of the centre of gravity of ABED
by Xi and yi, and the co-ordinates of the centre of pressure,
G, by x' and y'. Then, from Art. 168, the entire pressure on
ABED will be
wyi sin « fdm,
and its moment with respect to OX will be
y' y. w sin ay^ fdm (304)
But the expressions (303) and (304) are equal ; equating
them, and finding the value of y', we have,
y' = ^ (305)
In like manner, the sum of the moments of the elementary
pressures with respect to the axis of Y is
w sin a fxydm,
and that of the entire pressure with respect to the same
axis is
x'w sin axi fdm.
' Equating these expressions, and solving, we have.
30r.] MECHANICS OF LIQUIDS. 233
If the surface has a line of symmetry perpendicular to OX,
which is generally the case in practice, we may take that line
as the axis of T, in which case x' will be equal to 0, and the
centre of pressure will be determined by equation (305).
Equation (305) shows that tJie distance of the centre of
pressure on the plane surface from the intersection of
its plane with the free surface, is equal to the moment
of inertia of the surface divided hy the moment of the
area of the surface, hath taken with respect to the line
of intersection.
If we denote the moment of inertia of the surface by
M (P + y^), the moment of the mass will be equal to My^,
and from equation (305), we have,
y'-| +yr> (307)
in which h is the principal radius of gyration parallel to OT,
and yi is the distance of the centre of gravity from the same
line OX.
Because equation (305) is entirely independent of a,
the position of the centre of pressure with respect to OX is
independent of the inclination of the plane.
Examples.
1. Where is the centre of pressure on a rectangular flood-gate, the
upper line of the gate coinciding with the surface of the water.
Solution. — If we denote the length of the gate by %l, we have from
(217), h^ = P'; we also have y^ =1. Substituting them in (307), we
hiivo,
Hence, the centre of pressure is on the line of symmetry and two
thirds of the distance from the top to the bottom of the gate.
2. Let it be required to find the pressure on a submerged rectangular
334
MECHANICS.
flood-gate ABGD, the plane of the. gate being vertical. Also, the
distance of the centre of pressure below the surface of the
water. E & J
iC
1C"
D
Fig. la
B
Solution. — Let EF be the intersection of the plane with
the surface of the water, and suppose the rectangle AO to
be prolonged till it reaches ^^. Let C, C, and C", be the
centres of pressure of the rectangles EC, EB, and AC,
respectively. Denote the distance OC", by z, the distance
ED, by a, and the distance EA, by a'. Denote the breadth
of the gate, by 6, and the weight, a unit of volume of the
water, by w.
The pressure on EC will be equal to ^a'hw, and the pressure on EB
will be equal to ^a'^hw ; hence, the pressure on AG will be equal to
which is the pressure required.
Prom the principle of moments, the moment of the pressure on AG,
is equal to the moment of the pressure on EC, minus the moment of the
pressure on EB. Hence, from the last problem,
\hw (ffl= — a'^) X z= ibwa' x fas — ^bwa'^ x |a',
which is the required distance from the surface of the water.
This distance may be found directly from Equation (305).
3. Let it be required to find the pressure on a rectangular flood-gate,
when both sides are pressed, the water being at
different levels on the two sides. Also, to find
the centre of pressure.
Solution. — Denote the depth of water on one jg
side by a, and on the other side by a', the other
elements being the same as before. |c
The total pressure wUl, as before, be equal to,
ibwia" -a">).
Estimating z from C upward, we have
Fig; 137.'
Am.
MECHANICS OB LIQUIDS. 235
4. A sluice-gate, 10 feet square, is placed vertically, its upper edge
coinciding with the surface of the water. What is the pressure on the
Tipper and lower halves of the gate, respectively, the weight of a cubic
foot of water being taken equal to 62^ lbs. ?
Ans. 7812.5 lbs., and 33437.5 lbs.
5. What must be the thickness of a rectangular dam of granite, that
it may neither rotate about its outer angular edge nor slide along its
base, the weight of a cubic foot of granite being 160 lbs., and the co-
efficient of friction between it and the soil being .6 ?
Solution. — First, to find the thickness necessary to prevent rotation
outward. Denote the height of the wall, by h, and suppose the water
to extend from the bottom to the top. Denote the thickness, by t, and
the length of the wall, or dam, by I. The weight of the wall in pounds,
will be equal to
IM X 160 ;
and this being exerted through its centre of gravity, the moment of the
weight with respect to the outer edge, as an axis, will be equal to
^tHh X 160 = SOlht^.
The pressure of the water against the inner face, in pounds, is equal to
This pressure is applied at the centre of pressure, which. Example 1,
is at a distance from the bottom of the wall equal to ^h ; hence, its
moment with respect to the outer edge of the wall, is equal to
Ih" X 10.4166.
The pressure of the water tends to produce rotation outward, and the
weight of the wall acts to prevent this rotation. In order that these
forces may be in equilibrium, their moments must be equal ; or
mhfi = W X 10.4166.
Whence, we find, t - A\/.130a = .36 x h.
Next, to find the thickness necessary to prevent sliding along the
base. The entire force of friction due to the weight of the wall, is
equal to
160Z^X, and x represents KE.
If we describe a semicircle on EL, and
through D draw an ordinate, DH, we have, from a property
of the circle,
DII= ^/DK ■ DL = VW.
Hence we have, by substitution,
KE — 2DS.
252 MEcnANics.
Since there are two points on KL at which the ordinates
are equal, there must be two orifices through which the fluid
will spout to the same distance on the horizontal plane KE;
one of these is as far above the centre, 0, as the other is
below it.
If the orifice be at 0, midway between ^and L, the ordinate,
OS, will be greatest possible, and the range, KE', will bo a
maximum. The range in this case will be equal to the diam-
eter of the circle, LHK, or to the distance from the surface
of the water in the vessel to the horizontal plane.
Let a semi-parabola, LE', be described, having its axis,
LK, vertical, its focus at K, and its vertex at L ; then if we
suppose a jet to issue from K, being directed upward at dif-
ferent angles by a short pipe, it may be shown, as in Art. 108,
that every point within the curve may be reached by two
jets, every point on the curve may be reached by one jet, and
that points lying without the curve cannot be reached at all.
A jet thrown obliquely upward, as shown at A in Fig. 147,
is an arc of a parabola, since each particle may be regarded as
a projectile ; the circumstances of motion of the particles will
be made known by Equation (160). In like manner, the
same equation will make known the circumstances of motion
when a jet is projected obliquely downward.
Coefficients of Efflux and Velocity.
185. When a vessel empties itself through a small orifice
at its bottom, it is observed that the particles of fluid near
the top descend in vertical lines ; when they approach the
bottom they incline toward the oriflce, the converging lines
of fluid particles tending to cross fsach other as they emerge
from the vessel. The result is, that the stream grows nar-
rower, after leaving the vessel, until it reaches a point at a
distance from the vessel equal to about the radius of the
MECHANICS OF LIQUIDS. 253
orifice, when the contraction becomes a minimum, and below
that point the vein again spreads out. This phenomenon is
called the contraction of the vein. The cross-section at
the most contracted part of the vein, is not far from -^^ of
the area of the orifice, when the vessel is very thin. If we
denote the area of the orifice, by a, and the area of the least
cross-section of the vein, by a', we shall have,
a' = ka,
in which ^ is a number to be determined by experiment.
This number is called the coefficient of contraction.
To find the quantity of water discharged through an orifice
at the bottom of the containing vessel, in one second, we have
only to multiply the area of the smallest cross-section of the
vein, by the velocity. Denoting the quantity discharged in
one second, by Q', we shall have.
Q' = hav'^gh.
This formula is only true on the supposition that the actual
velocity is equal to the theoretical velocity, which is not the
case, as has been shown by experiment. The theoretical
velocity has been shown to be equal to V2^A, and if we de-
note the actual velocity, by v', we shall have,
v' = I V^gh,
in which I is to be determined by experiment ; this value of I is
slightly less than 1, and is called the coefficient of velocity.
In order to get the'actual discharge, we must replace V'^gh
by I V^gh, in the preceding equation. Doing so, and denot-
ing the actual discharge per second, by Q, we have,
Q = Ha V2gh.
The product Id, is called the coefficient of efflux. It
254 MECHANICS. [316.
has been shown by experiment, that this coefficient for
orifices in thin plates, is not quite constant. It decreases
slightly, as the area of the orifice and the velocity are in-
creased ; and it is further found to be greater for circular
orifices than for those of any other shape.
If we denote the coefficient of effiux, by m, we hare,
Q = ma ^/2gh (316)
In this equation, h is called the head of water. Hence,
we may define the head of loater to be the distance from the
orifice to the plane of the upper surface of the fluid.
The mean value of m corresponding to orifices of from \ an
inch to 6 inches in diameter, with from 4 to 20 feet head of
water, has been found to be about .615. If we take the
value of A = .64, we shall have.
That is, the actual velocity is only -^^ of the theoretical
velocity. This diminution is due to friction, viscosity, etc.
Efflux ThrouglL Short Tabes.
186. It is found that the discharge from a given orifice is
increased, when the thickness of the plate through which the
flow takes place, is increased ; also, when a short tube is
introduced.
When a tube AB, is employed which is not
more than four times as long as the diameter
of the orifice, the value of m becomes, on an
average, equal to .813 ; that is, the discharge j,. ^^
per second is 1.325 times greater when the
tube is used, than without it. In using the cylindrical tube,
the contraction takes place at the outlet of the vessel, and
not at the outlet of the tube.
MECHANICS OF LIQUIDS. 355
Compound mouth-pieces are sometimes used formed of
two conic frustums, as shown in the figure,
having the form of the vein. It has been
shown by Btelwein, that the most effective
tubes of this form should have the diameter
of the cross-section CD, equal to .833 of the
diameter AB. The angle made by the sides Kg. iso.
CF and DE, should be about 5° 9', and the
length of this portion should be three times that of the other.
Examples.
1. With what theoretical velocity will water issue from a small orifice
16^ feet below the surface of the fluid ? Ans. 33J ft.
3. If the area of the orifice, in the last example, is ^ of a square foot,
and the ooeffleient of eflux .615, how many cubic feet of water will be
discharged per minute? i Ans. 118.695 cw. y?.
3. A vessel, constantly filled with water, is 4 feet high, with a cross-
section of one square foot; an orifice in the bottom has an area of one
square inch. In what time will three fourths of the water be drawn ofE,
the coefficient of efflux being .6 ? Ans. | of a minute, nearly.
4. A vessel is kept constantly full of water. How many cubic feet of
water will be discharged per minute from an orifice 9 feet below the
upper surface, having an area of 1 square inch, the coefficient of efflux
being .6 ? Ans. 6 cubic feet, about.
6. In the last example, what will be the discharge per minute, if we
suppose each square foot of the upper surface to be pressed by a force of
645 lbs. ? Ans. 8f cubic feet, about.
6. The head of water is 16 feet, and the orifice is -j^ of a square foot.
What quantity of water will be discharged per second, when the orifice
is through a thin plate?
Solution. — In this case, we have,
Q = .615 X .01 V2 X 33J x 16 = .197 cubic feet.
When a short cylindrical tube is used, we have,
§ = .197 X 1.325 =: .?61 cubic feet.
In Etelwein's compound mouth-piece, if we take the smallest cross-
35G MECHANICS. [317-
section as the orifice, and denote it by a, it is found that the discharge
is 2J times that through an orifice of the same size in a thin plate. In
this case, we have, supposing a = -j^ of a square foot,
Q = .197 X 2J = .49 cubic feet.
Time Required for a Vessel to Empty Itself.
ISt. Let it be required to find the time in which a Tessel
will empty itself through a small orifice in its bottom. As-
sume a horizontal plane of reference through the orifice, and
denote the distance from this plane to the free surface by z ;
denote the area of the free surface by S, and suppose this
surface to be depressed by the outflow through a distance dz
in the time dt ; the entire volume of the outflow in the time
dt will then be equal to Sdz. But the effective velocity of
outflow is equal to m\^2gz;, if we denote the area of the
orifice by a, we shall therefore have for the volume of the
outflow ma^/^gz dt. Equating these values, we have
ma'\/"lgzdt =8dz,oxdt =L := • -r, (317)
ma'\/%g 2*
in which the second member is made negative because z di-
minishes as t increases.
Integrating (317) from li the original height of the liquid
above the orifice to 0, we have
t = — ^ _ /'" ^^ (318)
which gives the required time.
Examples.
1. Let S be constant and equal to A : in this case we have from (318),
for the time required for the vessel to empty itself.
319-1 MECHANICS OF LIQUIDS. 257
t = — = —4/— 319)
ma y-^g mar g ^ '
in which m may be taken equal to .615.
3. Let the surface be a surface of revolution whose axis is vertical, and
let the equation of its meridian curve be a;* =:p^z. In this ease we have
S=vx^ — irp'z^ ; substituting in (318), we have
t = ^-= f°irp^dz (320)
^V2gJh
Performing the integration from h to z, we have
t = -^= (h-z) (331)
From which we see that t varies as the height through which the free
surface falls.
Making z = 0, in (330), we have for the time required for the vessel to
empty itself,
t=^^^ (332)
ma 4/3^
Other examples may be solved in a similar manner.
Motion of Water in Open Channels.
188. When i^ater flows through an open channel, as in a
river, canal, or opeli aqueduct, the form of the channel
being always the same, and the supply of water being con-
stant, it is a matter of observation that the flow becomes
steady ; that is, the quantity of water that flows through any
cross-section, in a given time, is constant. On account of
adhesion, friction, etc., the particles of water next the sides
and bottom of the channel have their motion retarded. This
retardation is imparted to the next layer of particles, but in
a less degree, and so on, till a line of particles is reached
358 MECHANICS.
whose velocity is greater than that of any other filament.
This line, or filament of particles, is called the axis of the
stream. In the case of cylindrical pipes, the axis coincides
sensibly with the axis of the pipe ; in straight, open chan-
nels, it coincides with that line of the upper surface which
is midway between the sides.
A section at right angles to the axis is called a cross-sec-
tion, and, from what has been shown, the velocities of the
fiuid particles will be different at different points of the same
cross-section. The mean velocity corresponding to any
cross-section, is the average velocity of the particles at every
point of that section. The mean velocity may be found by
dividing the volume which flows through the section in one
second, by the area of the cross-section. Since the same vol-
ume flows through each cross-section per second, after the
flow has become uniform, it follows that, in channels of vary-
ing width, the mean velocity, at any section, will be inversely
as the area of the section.
The intersection of the plane of cross-section with the sides
and bottom of the channel, is called the perimeter of the
section. In the case of a pipe which is constantly filled, the
perimeter is the entire line of intersection of the plane of
cross-section, with the interior surface of the pipe.
The -mean velocity of water in an open channel depends, in
the first place, upon its inclination to the horizon. As the
inclination becomes greater, the component of gravity in the
direction of the channel increases, and, consequently, the
velocity becomes greater. Denoting the inclination by I, and
resolving the -force of gravity into two components, one at
right angles to the upper surface, and the other parallel to it,
we shall have for the latter component,
g sin /.
This is the only force that acts to increase the velocity.
332.] MECHANICS OF LIQUIDS. 359
The Telocity will be diminished by frictioiij, adhesion, etc.
The total effect of these resistances will depend upon the
ratio of the perimeter to the area of the cross-section, and
also upon the velocity. The cross-section being the same, the
resistances will increase as the perimeter increases ; conse-
quently, for the same cross-section, the resistance of friction
will be the least possible when the perimeter is the least pos-
sible. The retardation of the flow will also diminish as the
area of the cross-section is increased, other things remaining
unchanged.
If we denote the area of the cross-section by a, the perim-
eter by P, and the velocity by v, we shall have,
" ^^^ = /W,
in which f(v) denotes some function of v.
Since the inclination is very small in all practical cases, we
may place the inclination itself for the sine of the inclination,
and doing so, it has been shown by Peont, that the function
of V may be expressed by two terms, one of which is of the
first, and the other of the second degree, with respect to v ;
or,
2-p- = mv -\- nv\
Denoting -^ by J2, — by k, and - by I, we have, finally,
kv + Iv^ = RI,
in which h and I are constants, to be determined by experi-
ment. According to Etelweik, we have,
h = .0000342651, and I = .0001114155.
260 MECHANICS. [323.
Substituting these values, and solving with respect to v,
we have.
v= — 0.1088941604 + V.0118580490 + 8975.414385^/,
from which the velocity can he found when E and I are
known. The values of 7c and I, and consequently that of v,
were found by Pkont to be somewhat different from those
given above. Those of Etelwein are selected for the reason
that they were based upon a much larger number of experi-
ments than those of Peojsty.
Having the mean velocity and the area of the cross-section,
the quantity of water delivered in any time can be computed.
Denoting the quantity delivered in n seconds by Q, and re-
taining the preceding notation, we have,
Q = nav (323)
The quantity of water to be delivered is generally one of
the data in all practical problems involving the distribution
of water. The difference of level of the point of supply and
delivery is also known. The preceding principles enable us
to give such a form to the cross-section of the canal, or aque-
duct, as will insure the requisite supply.
Were it required to apply the results just deduced, to the
case of irregular channels, or to those in which there were
many curves, a considerable modification would be required.
The theory of these modifications does not come within the
limits assigned to this treatise. For a complete discussion of
the whole subject of hydraulics in a popular form, the reader
is referred to the TraiU d' Hydraulique D'AuBissoN.
Motion of Water in Pipes.
189. The circumstances of the motion of water in pipes,
are closely analogous to those of -its motion in open channels.
MECHANICS OF LIQUIDS. 261
The forces which tend to impart motion are dependent upon
the weight of the water in the pipe, and upon the height
of the water in the upper reservoir.
Those which tend to prevent motion ^Je
depend upon -the depth of water in the ML --— ^ j V ■
lower reservoir, friction in the pipe, ^^^^^ ^B*^
adhesion, and shocks arising from ir- i^^^
regularities in the bore of the pipe. The
retardation due to shocks will, for the present, be neglected.
Let AB represent a straight cylindrical pipe, connecting
two reservoirs R and R'. Suppose the water to maintain its
level at E, in the upper, and at G, in the lower reservoir.
Denote AH by h, and BC hy h'. Denote the length of the
pipe by I, its circumference by c, its cross-section by a, its
inclination by 4>, and the weight of a unit of volume of water
by w^
Experience shows that, under the circumstances above in-
dicated; the flow soon becomes uniform. We may then re-
gard the entire mass of fluid in the pipe as a coherent solid,
moving with a mean uniform velocity down the inclined
plane AB.
The weight of the water in the pipe will be equal to wal.
If we resolve this weight into two components, one perpen-
dicular to, and the other coinciding with the axis of the tube,
we shall have for the latter component, wal sin 0. But I sin
is equal to DB. Denoting this distance by h", we shall have
for the pressure in the direction of the axis, due to the weight
of the water in the pipe, the expression wah". This pressure
acts from A toward B. The pressure due to the weight of
the water in R, and acting in the same direction, is wah.
The forces acting from B toward A, are, first, that due to
the weight of the water in R', which is equal to wah' ; and,
secondly, the resistance due to friction and adhesion. This
resistance depends upon the length of the pipe, its circumfer-
262 MECHAKICS. [324.
ence and the velocity. It has heen shown, by experiment,
that this force may be expressed by the term,
cl {kv + k'l^).
Since the velocity has been supposed unif orin, the forces
acting in the direction of the axis must be in equilibrium.
Hence,
wah + wdh" = wah' + cl {kv + k'v^) ;
whence, by reduction,
k
w
k' , a/k + h"-h'\
w c\ I • I
The factor - is equal to one fourth of the diameter of the
pipe. Denoting this by d, we shall have, - =. ^d; denoting
k , k\ h + h" — li' .
— by m, — by n, and 7 by s, we have,
mv + niy^ = \sd (3^4)
The values of m and n, as determined experimentally by
Peony, are,
m = 0.00017, and n = 0.000106.
Hence, by substitution,
.00017W + .000106?;a = ^sd.
If V is not very small, the first term may be neglected,
which will give,
V = 48.56 Vsd.
If we denote the quantity of water delivered in n seconds
by Q, we shall have,
Q = nav = 48.56 naVsd. (325)
MECHANICS OF LIQUIDS. 363
The velocity will be greatly dimiDished if the tube is
curved to any considerable extent, or if its diameter is not
uniform throughout. It is not intended to enter into a dis-
cussion of these cases ; their complete development would
require more space than has been allotted to this branch of
Mechanics.
General Remarks on the Distribution and Flow of Water in
Pipes.
190. Whenever an obstacle occurs in the course of an open
channel or pipe, a change of velocity must take place. In
passing the obstacle, the velocity of the water will increase,
and then, impinging upon that which has already passed, a
shock will take place. This shock consumes a certain amount
of kinetic energy, and thus diminishes the velocity of the
stream. All obstacles should be avoided ; or, if any are un-
avoidable, the stream should be diminished, and again en-
larged gradually, so as to avoid, as much as possible, the
necessary shock incidient to sudden changes of velocity.
For a like reason, when a branch enters the main channel,
it should be made to enter as nearly in the direction of the
current as possible.
All changes of direction give rise to mutual impacts
amongst the particles, and the more, as the change is more
abrupt. Hence, when a change of direction is necessary, the
straight branches should be made tangential to the curved
portion.
The entrance to, and outlet from a pipe or channel, should
be enlarged, in order to diminish, as much as possible, the
coefiQcients of ingress and egress.
When a pipe passes over uneven ground, sometimes ascend-
ing, and sometimes descending, there is a tendency to a col-
lection of bubbles of air, at the highest points, which may
finally come to act as an impeding. cause to the flow. There
264 MEOHAKICS.
should, therefore, be suitable pipes inserted at the highest
points, to permit the confined air to escape.
Finally, attention should be given to the form of the cross-
section of the channel. If the channel is a pipe, it should be
made cylindrical. If it is a canal or open aqueduct, that
form should be given to the perimeter which would give the
greatest cross-section, and, at the same time, conform to the
necessary conditions of the structure. The perimeter in open
channels is generally trapezoidal, from the necessity of the
case ; and it should be remembered, that the nearer the form
approaches a semicircle, the greater will be the flow.
IX.— MECHANICS OF GASES AND VAPOKS.
Gases and Vapors.
191. G-ases and vapors are distinguished from other
fluids by their great compressibility and correspondingly great
expansibility. They continually tend to expand, and if left
free the expansion will go on till counteracted by some ex-
traneous force, as that of gravity, or the resistance offered by
a containing vessel.
The force with which a gas or vapor tends to expand is
called its tension, or its elastic force. When the pressure
exerted by a gas or vapor on a surface is uniform, that is,
when it is the same at all points of the surface, we take as its
unit of measure the pressure on a square inch of the surface.
If we denote this unit by^, the area pressed by a, and the
total pressure by P, we then have,
P^ap (326)
When the pressure is variable, we take for the unit of
measure at any point the pressure that would be exerted on a
square inch, if the pressure were the same at every point of
the square inch, as at the point in question. But we may
regard the pressure on any infinitesimal element, dm, as con-
stant throughout the element ; hence, in this case we have,
as before,
P — dmxp (337)
Many of the principles already demonstrated for liquids
hold good for gases and vapors, but there are certain prop-
erties arising from elasticity which are peculiar to aeriform
bodies, some of which if is now proposed to investigate.
266 MECHAKICS.
Atmospheric Air.
193. The gaseous fluid that envelops our globe, and ex-
tends on all sides to a distance of many miles, is called the
atmosphere. It consists principally of nitrogen and oxy-
gen, together with small but variable portions of watery vapor
and carbonic acid, all in a state of mixture. On an average,
it is found that 1000 parts by volume of atmospheric air,
taken near the surface of the earth, consist of about,
788 parts of nitrogen,
197 parts of oxygen,
14 parts of watery vapor,
1 part of carbonic acid.
The atmosphere may be taken as a type of gases, for it is
found by experiment that the laws regulating density, expan-
sibility, and elasticity, are the same for all gases and vapors,
so long as they maintain a purely gaseous form. "It is found,
however, in the case of vapors, and of those gases which
have been reduced to a liquid form, that the laws change just
before actual liquefaction.
This change appears to be somewhat analogous to that ob-
served when water passes from the liquid to the solid form.
Although water does not actually freeze till reduced to a
temperature of 32° Fah., it is found that it reaches its maxi-
mum density at about 39°, at which temperature the particles
seem to commence arranging themselves according to some
new law, preparatory to taking on the solid form.
Atmospheric Pressure.
193. If a tube, 35 or 36 inches long, open at one end and
closed at the other, be filled with pure mercury, and inverted
in a basin of the same, it is observed that the mercury
B
JMECHAinCS OF GASES AND VAPOBS. 367
at the level of the sea will fall in the tube until the
vertical distance from the surface of the mercury in
the tube to that in the basin is about 30 inches. This c
column of mercury is sustained by the pressure of the
atmosphere exerted upon the surface of the mercury
in the basin, and transmitted through the fluid, accord-
ing to the general law of trans?)iission of pressures.
The column of mercury sustained by the elasticity of
the atmosphere is called the barometric column, be-
cause it is generally measured by an instrument called
a barometer. . In fact, the instrument just described. Fig. 15?.
when provided with a suitable scale for measuring the
altitude' of the column, is a barometer. The height of the
barometric column fluctuates somewhat, even at the same
place, on account of changes of temperature, and other
causes yet to be considered.
Observation has shown, that the average height of the
barometric column at the level of the sea, is a little less than
30 inches. But the weight of a column of mercury 30 inches
in height is nearly 15 lbs. ; hence, a pressure of 15 lbs. on'a
square inch is adopted as a tmit of measure, and is technically
called an atmosphere.
This unit is often employed in measuring the pressure of
elastic fluids, particularly in the case of steam. Thus, when
we say that the pressure of steam in a boiler is two atmos-
pheres, we are to understand that there is a pressure of 30 lbs.
on each square inch of the interior of the boiler. In general,
when we say that the tension of a gas or vapor is equal to n
atmospheres, we mean that it is capable of exerting a pressure
of n times 15 lbs. on each square inch of the surface with
which it may be in contact.
The specific gravity of mercury being nearly 13.6, a mer-
curial column of 30 inches is equivalent to a water column of
34 feet.
268 MECHANICS.
Mariotte's Law.
194. When a given mass of any gas or vapor is com-
pressed so as to occupy a smaller space, other things being
equal, its elastic force is increased ; on the contrary, if its
volume is increased, its elastic force is diminished.
The law of increase and diminution of elastic force, first
discovered by Maeiotte, and bearing his name, may be
enunciated as follows :
The elastic force of a given, mass of any gas, whose
temperature remains the same, varies inversely as the
volume which it occupies.
As long as the mass remains the same, the density must
vary inversely as the volume occupied. Hence, from Mari-
otte's law, it follows, that.
The elastic force of any gas, whose temperature re-
mains the same, varies as its density, and conversely, the
density vanes as the elastic force.
Mariotte's law may be verified for atmospheric air, by
an instrument called Mabiotte's tube. This is a tube,
A BCD, of uniform bore, bent so that its two
branches are parallel to each other. The shorter
branch, AB, is closed at its upper extremity, whilst
the longer one is open. Between the two branches,
and attached to the frame, is a scale of equal parts.
To use the instrument, place it in a vertical po-
sition, and pour mercury into the tube, until it
just cuts off communication between the two
branches. The mercury will then stand at the same
level, BC, in both branches, and the tension of the
air in AB, will be exactly equal to that of the ex- Kg. 153,
temal atmosphere. If an additional quantity of
mercury be poured into the longer branch, the air in the
shorter branch will be compressed, and the mercury will rise
328.] MECHAliriCS OF GASES AKD VAPORS. 269
in both branches, but higher in the longer, than in the
shorter one. Suppose the mercury to have risen in the
shorter branch, to K, and in the longer one, to P. There
will be an equilibrium in the mercury lying below the hori-
zontal plane, KK ; there will also be an equilibrium between
the tension of the air in AK, and the forces which give rise
to that tension. /These forces are, the pressure of the ex-
ternal atmosphere, transmitted through the mercury, and the
weight of a column of mercury whose base is the cross-section
of the tube, and whose altitude is PK. If we denote the
height of the column of mercury sustained by the pressure of
the external atmosphere, by h, the tension of the air in AK,
will be measured by the weight of a column of mercury,
whose base is the cross-section of the tube, and whose height
is h -|- PK. Since the weight is proportional to the height,
the tension of the confined air is proportional to h + PK.
Now, whatever may be the value of PK, we have, from the
assumed law,
AK : AB :: h : h + PK;
whence,
^^=;rri4 (^^«)
If PK = h, we have, AK=^AB; if PK = 2h, we have,
AK=iA£; if PK = nh, n being any positive number,
AB
entire or fractional, we have, AK=: -. Formula (338),
deduced from Maeiotte's law, was verified by Duiong and
Aeago for all values of n, up to w = 37.
The law may also be verified when the pressure is less than
an atmosphere, by the following apparatus : ^^ is a tube of
uniform bore, closed at its upper and open at its lower- ex-
tremity ; CD is a deep cistern of mercury. The tube, AK,
is either graduated into equal parts, commencing at A, or has
attached to it a graduated scale of brass or ivory.
270 MECHANICS. [329-
To use the instrument, pour mercury into the tube till it
is nearly full ; place the finger over the open end, invert it in
the cistern, and depress it till the mercury stands at
the same level without and within the tube, and sup- n a
pose the surface of the mercury in this case to be at Hit
B. Then will the tension of the air, in AB, be
equal to that of the external atmosphere. If the
tube be raised vertically, the air va. AB will expand,
its tension will diminish, and the mercury will fall
in the tube, to maintain the equilibrium. Suppose
the level of the mercury in the tube, to have reached
K. In this position of the instrument the tension dI
of the air in AE, added to the weight of the column
of mercury, KE, will be equal to the tension of the external air.
Now, it is found, whatever may be the value of KE, that
whence.
AE: AB :: 7i : h — EE;
^^ = ^E (^^^)
If EE = \Th, we have, AE = 2AB ; if EE = f A, we have
AE = SAB ; in general, if EE= -7i, we have, AE =
AB {n + 1).
Formula (339) has been verified, for all values of n, up to
n = 111.
It is a law of Physics that, when a gas is suddenly com-
pressed, heat is evolved, and when a gas is suddenly expanded,
heat is absorbed ; hence, in making the experiment, care must
be taken that the temperature be kept uniform.
More recent experiments have shown that Mariotte's law is
not strictly true, especially for high tensions, yet its variation ,
is so small that the error committed in regarding it as true is
not appreciable in practical mechanics.
330.] MECHASriCS OF GASES AND VAPORS. 271
Gay Lnssac's Law.
195. II the volume of any gas or vapor remain the same,
and its temperature be increased, its tension is increased also.
If the pressure remain the same, the volume of the gas in-
creases as the temperature is raised.
Let us assume that a given mass of gas or vapor occupies a
certain volume at the temperature 33° F. ; then the law dis-
covered by Gay Ldssac, and which bears his name, may be
enunciated as follows :
If the volume remains the sam,e, its increase of
tension varies as its increase of temperature; if its
tension remains the same, its increase of volume paries
as its increase of temperature.
According to Regnadlt, if a given mass of air be heated
from 32° Fahrenheit to 312°, the tension remaining constant,
its volume will be increased by the .3665th part of its volume
at 32°. Hence, the increase for each degree of temperature
is the .00204th part of its volume at 32°. If we denote the
volume at 32° by v, and the volume at the temperature t' de-
grees, by v', we have,
v' = «;[1*4- .00204 (;;' — 32)] (330) _
Solving with reference to v, we have,
v'
" = 1 + . 00204 (^'-32) <^^^^)
Formula (331) enables us to compute the volume of a mass
of air at 32°, when we know its volume at the temperature
f degrees, the pressure remaining constant.
To find the volume at the temperature t" degrees, we haye
simply to substitute t" for t' in (330). Denoting this volume
by v", we have,
v" =zv[l+ .00304 {t" — 32)].
275 MECHAKICS. [332.
Substituting for v its value, from (331), we get,
, 1 + .00204(^-32) >
" = *' 1 + . 00204 (^'-32) ^^^^'
This formula enables us to compute the volume of a mass
of air, at a temperature t", when we know its volume at the
temperature f ; and, since the density varies inversely as the
volume, we may also, by means of the same formula, find the
density of any mass of air, at the temperature t", when we
have given its density at the temperature t'.
* Absolute Temperature.
196. In the practical applications of the laws of Maeiottb
and G-AT Ltjssac it is often found convenient to reckon tem-
peratures from a zero point, so taken that the volume of a gas
or vapor of given tension shall always b^ proportional to its
temperature.
To find the position of such a zero point on the Fahrenheit
scale, let ns consider the case of an ideal air ther-
mometer. Let ^^ be a tube of uniform cross- ^
section closed at the bottom and open at -the top ; '
let P'be an air-tight piston without weight, which
moves freely and without friction up and down the
tube ; and suppose a given mass of air to be con-
fined between the bottom of the tube and the piston.
When the temperature of the confined air is 32° F.
suppose the piston to be at O, and when its tem- ^
perature is 212° suppose the piston to be at D. ^^ jgg
Divide CD into 180 equal parts and continue the
scale to the bottom of the tube ; then if the scale thus de-
termined is numbered from the bottom upward, the lower
division being numbered 0, it is obvious that the numbers
thus found will be proportional to the corresponding volumes
333.] MECHANICS OF GASES AND VAPORS. 273
of the confined air. To find the number of divisions of the
scale between G and A. Denote ^C by 1 ; then, from the
law of expansion as deduced by Eegnault, CD will be equal to
.3665 ; and if we denote the number of divisions in GA by x,
we shall have,
GD : AG wW) : x; or .3665 : 1 : : 180 : a; ;
whence,
X = 491, nearly (333)
If, therefore, the Fahrenheit scale be extended downward
491 divisions below the freezing point of water, and if the lowest
point of the scale be taken as the zero point, the volume of
the confined air will always be proportional to its temperature.
On the scale thus determined the freezing point of water is at
491°, and the boiling point is 671° ; at the former tempera-
ture the volume of the confined air is 1, and at the latter
temperature it is 1.3665 ; and we obviously have,
491° : 671° : : 1 : 1.3665.
Temperatures counted from the zero point thus determined
are called absolute temperatures.
The zero point of the absolute scale is 4^1° — 32°, or
459° below the zero point of the Fahrenheit scale ; hence, we
may convert any ordinary temperature into the corresponding
absolute temperature by adding to it 459°. Thus, 35° F.
(ordinary temperature) is equivalent to 484° F. absolute tem-
perature.
The absolute zero point of the centigrade scale is 491°-=-1.8,
or, 373°, nearly, below the centigrade zero point. Hence,
any ordinary temperature, as given by the centigrade ther-
mometer, may be converted into absolute centigrade temper-
ature by adding to it 373°. Thus, 15° C. (ordinary temper-
ature) is equivalent to 388° C. absolute temperature.
If we denote the volume of a given mass of gas or vapor by
2U
MECHANICS.
[334.
V, the pressure per square inch on its surface by F, and its
absolute temperature by T, the relation between these quanti-
ties may be expressed by the equation.
FV
= a constant
(334)
If Tis constant, we see that P varies inversely as V; which
is Makiotte's law.
If F is constant, P varies as T ; if P is constant, V varies
as T; which is Gat Lussao's law.
Hence, we see that Makiotte's and Gut Lussac's law are
both particular cases of a more general law which is given by
equation (334).
Manometers.
197. A manometer is an instrument for measuring the
tension of gases and vapors, particularly of steam. Two
principal varieties of manometers are used for measuring the
tension of steam, the open, and the closed manometer.
J^m
The Open Manometer.
198. The* open manometer consists of an open glass
tube, AB, terminating near the bottom of a cistern BF.
The cistern is of wrought-iron, steam-tight,
and filled with mercury. Its dimensions are
such, that the upper surface of the mercury
will not be materially lowered, when a portion
of the mercury is forced up the tube. BB is
a tube, by means of which, steam may be ad-
mitted from the boiler to the surface of the
mercury in the cistern. This tube is some-
times filled with water, through which the
pressure of the steam is transmitted to the E
mercury.
Fig. 156.
MECHANICS OF GASES AND VAPORS. 275
To graduate the instrument. All communication with the
boiler is cut off, by closing the stop-cock, E, and communi-
cation with the external air is made by opening the stop-cock,
D. The point H of the tube at which the mercury stands is
then marked 1. From the point H, distances equal to 30,
60, 90, etc., inches are laid off upward, and the correspond-
ing points numbered 2, 3, 4, etc. These divisions corre-
spond to atmospheres, and may be subdivided into tenths and
hundredths.
To use the instrument, the stop-cock, D, is closed, and
communication made with the boiler, by opening the stop-
cock, E. The height to which the mercury rises in the tube
indicates the tension of the steam in the boiler, which may
be read from the scale in terms of atmospheres and decimals
of an atmosphere. If the pressure in pounds is wished, it
may at once be found by multiplying the reading of the in-
strument by 15.
The pressure, when the surface of the mercury stands at 1
is the actual pressure of the atmosphere at the time of ob-
servation ; hence, if great accuracy is required, the reading
of the instrument must be corrected for the excess of 30 in.
over the barometric column. Thus, if the reading of the
manometer is 3 and the barometric column is 29 in., the true
reading is 3 — -gV = 2||.
The principal objection to this kind of manometer is its
want of portability, and the great length of tube required,
when high tensions are to be measured.
The Closed Manometer.
199. The general construction of the closed manometer
is the same as that of the open manometer, except that the
tube, AB, is closed at the top. The air confined in the
tube, is compressed in the same way as in Maeiottb's tube.
To graduate this instrument. Find by experiment the
276 MECHANICS. [^35.
point H, that is, the point at which the mercury stands in
the tube when the pressure is an atmosphere of 30 inches ;
this we mark 1, and then "we determine the other divisions by-
means of the following formula.
Denote the distance in inches, from H to the top of the
tube, by I ; the pressure on the mercury, in atmospheres, by
n, and the distance in inches, from H to the upper surface of
the mercury in the tube, by x.
The tension of the air in the tube is equal to that on the
mercury in the cistern, diminished by the weight of a column
of mejcury whose altitude is x. Hence, in. atmospheres, it is
X
'^-30-
The bore of the tube being uniform, the volume of the
compressed air is proportional to its height. When the press-
ure is 1 atmosphere, the height is I ; when the pressure is
(« — q7^) atmospheres, the height is / — x. Hence, from
Mariotte's law,
l:n-^^::l-x:l.
Whence, by reduction,
x^ — (30re ■\-t)z= — 30Z(ra — 1),
Solving, with respect to x, we have,
30»» '+ I
x =
2
?±A/-ao<(»-i)H.(55i+J)!
The upper sign of the radical is not used, as it would give
a value for x, greater than /. Taking the lower sign, and
assuming 1 = 30 in., we hare,
x=15n + 15~ V — 900(w — 1) + (15w + 15)» . , . (335)
MECHANICS OF GASES AND VAPOES. 377
Making n=2, 3, 4, etc., in succession, we find for x, the
values, 11.46 in., 17.58 in., 20.93 in., etc. These distances
being set ofE from IT, upward, and marked 2, 3, 4, etc., indi-
cate atmospheres. The intermediate spaces may be subdi-
vided by the same formula.
In making the graduation, we have supposed the tempera-
ture to remain the same. If, however, it does not remain
the same, the reading of the instrument must be corrected by
means of a table computed for the purpose.
The instrument is used in the same manner as that already
described. ITeither can be used for measuring tensions less
than 1 atmosphere.
The Siphon Gauge.
300. The siphon gauge is used to measure tensions of
gases and vapors, less than an atmosphere. It consists of a
tube, ABO, bent so that its two branches are parallel.
The branch, BC, is closed at the top, and filled with
mercury, which is retained by the pressure of the
atmosphere ; the branch, AB, is open at the top. If
the air be rarefied in any manner, or, if the mouth of
the tube be exposed to the action of a gas whose
tension is sufficiently small, the mercury will no longer j-ITTot.
be supported in BC, but will fall in it, and rise in
BA. The distance between the surfaces of the mercury in
the two branches, given by a scale between them, indicates
the tension of the gas. If this distance is expressed in inches,
the tension can be found, in atmospheres, by dividing by 30,
or, in pounds, by dividing by 3.
The Diving-Bell.
201. The diving-bell is a bell-shaped vessel, open at the
bottom, used for descending into the water. The bell is
^^
■31
278 MECHANICS.
placed with its mouth horizontal, and let
down by a rope, AB, the whole apparatus
being sunk by weights properly adjusted.
The air contained in the bell is compressed
by the pressure of the water, but its increased
elasticity prerents the water from rising to pig. isg.
the top of the bell, which is provided with
seats for the accommodation of those within the bell. The
air, constantly contaminated by breathing, is continually re-
placed by fresh air, pumped in through a tube, FG. Were
there no additional air introduced, the volume of the com-
pressed air, at any depth, might be computed by Maeiottb's
law. The unit of the compressing force, in this case, is the
weight of a column of water whose cross-section is a square
inch, and whose height is the distance from DC to the sur-
face of the water.
The principle of the diving-bell is used in the diving-
dress. The diver is surrounded by a water-tight envelope,
fitted with a helmet, into which air is pumped from above, as
in the diving-bell. There is, as in the diving-bell, an escape
valve, by means of which circulation of the air is maintained.
The diving-bell is used in constructing foundations and other
submarine works ; the diving-dress is principally used in sub-
marine explorations.
The Barometer.
303. The barometer is an instrument for measuring the
pressure of the atmosphere. It consists of a glass tube, her-
metically sealed at one extremity, filled with mercury, and
inverted in a basin of that fluid. The pressure of the air is
indicated by the height of mercury that it supports.
A variety of forms of mercurial barometers have been devised,
all involving the same mechanical principle. The most impor-
tant of these are the siphon and the cistern barometers.
A
MECHANICS OF GASES AND VAPOKS. 279
The Siphon Barometer.
203. The siphon barometer consists of a tube, GDE,
bent so that its two branches, CD and DE, are parallel to each
other. A scale is placed between them, and attached
to the same frame as the tube. The longer branch, -rfiC
CD, is hermetically sealed at the top, and filled vith
mercury ; the shorter one is open to the air. "When
the instrument is placed vertically, the mercury sinks
in the longer branch and rises in the shorter one.
The distance between the surface of the mercury in
the two branches indicates the pressure of the atmos-
phere. To prevent shocks when handling the instru- ^
ment, the tube is drawn to a narrow neck in the neigh- Fig. 159.
borhood of the point marked B in the diagram.
The Cistern Barometer.
304. The cistern barometer consists of a glass tube,
filled with mercury, and inverted in a cistern of the same. The
tube is surrounded by a frame of metal, attached to the cistern.
Two longitudinal openings, near the upper part of
the frame, permit the upper surface of the mer- "^
cury to be seen. A slide, moved up and down by
a rack and pinion, may be brought exactly to the
upper level of the mercury. The height of the
column is then read from a scale, whose is at the
surface of the mercury in the cistern. The scale
is graduated to inches and tenths, and smaller
divisions are read by means of a vernier.
The figure shows the essential parts of a com-
plete cistern barometer ; KK represents the frame ; *-^
HH, the cistern, the upper part of which is of -^-^^x^,
glass, that the mercury in the cistern may be seen
through it ; L, & thermometer, to show the temperature of
s
380
MECHANICS.
m
w
D
Fig. 161.
the mercury; JV, a sliding-ring bearing the vernier, and
moved up and down by the pinion, M.
The cistern is shown on an enlarged scale in
Fig. 161 ; A is the barometer tube, terminating
in a small opening, to prevent sudden shocks when
the instrument is moved from place to place ; H,
the frame of the cistern ; B, the upper portion of
the cistern, made of glass, that the mercury may
be seen ; B, a piece of ivory, projecting from the
upper surface of the cistern, whose point corre-
sponds to the of the scale ; 00, the lower part
of the cistern, made of leather, or other flexible
material, and firmly attached to the glass part ;
D, a screw, working through the frame, and
against the bottom of the bag, CO, by means of a plate, F.
The screw, D, serves to bring the surface of the mercury to
the point of ivory, B, and also to force the mercury to the top
of the tube, when it is desired to transport the barometer
from place to place.
To use this barometer; it is suspended vertically, and the
level of the mercury in the cistern brought to the point of
ivory, B, by the screw, D ; a smart rap on the frame will
detach the mercury from the glass, to which it tends to ad-
here. The ring, JV, is run up or down till its lower edge
appears tangent to the surface of the mercury in the tube, aud
the altitude is read from the scale. The height of the at-
tached thermometer should also be noted.
The requirements of a good barometer are, sufficient width
of tube, perfect purity of mercury, and a scale with an accu-
rately graduated vernier.
The bore of the tube should be as large as practicable, to
diminish the effect of capillary action. On account of the
repulsion between the glass and mercury, the latter is de-
pressed in the tube, and this depression increases as the diam-
eter of the tube diminishes.
MECHAKICS OF GASES AND VAPOKS. 381
In all cases, this depression should be allowed for, and the
reading corrected hy a table computed for the purpose.
To secure purity of the mercury, it should be carefully dis-
tilled, and after the tube is filled, it should be boiled to drive
off any bubbles of air that may adhere to the tube.
Uses of the Barometer.
205. The primary object of the barometer is, to measure
the pressure of the atmosphere. It is used by mariners as a
weather-glass. It is also employed for determining the heights
of points on the earth's surface, above the level of the sea.
The principle on which it is employed for the latter purpose
is, that the pressure of the atmosphere at any place depends
on the weight of a column of air reaching from the place to
the upper limit of the atmosphere. As we ascend above the
level of the ocean, the weight of the column diminishes;
consequently, the pressure becomes less, a fact which is shown
by the mercury falling in the tube.
Difference of Level 'Between Two Stations.
206. Let us suppose the atmosphere to be in a state of
equilibrium, and the temperature of the atmos-
phere and of the mercury to be 32° F., both at A',— ,p,'d'
the upper and at the lower station ; and further-
more, suppose that the force of gravtity does not j^. =1?, <5
vary in passing from one station to the other.
Conceive a cylindrical colufan of air whose
cross-section is 1 square inch to extend from the
bottom of the atmosphere to the top. Then, be-
cause the atmosphere is supposed to be in equi- ^ j | |p j,
librium, the lateral pressures in each horizontal Kg. lea.
layer will balance each other, and we may tr^t the
column as though it were inclosed in a vertical tube.
Let A A' he a portion of such a column, A being in the
horizontal plane passing through the lower station, and A' in
383 MECHANICS. [336.
the horizontal plane passing through the upper station ; de-
note the pressure of the atmosphere at A by P, and at ^' by
P' ; denote the density of the air at A by D, and at ^' by
D' ; at any point a between A and A' and at a distance from
A equal to z, let the pressure be denoted by p and the density
by (J.
The change of pressure in passing from the height z to the
height z + dz, denoted by dp, will obviously be equal to the
weight of the infinitesimal layer whose height is dz ; but the
weight of this layer, equal to its volume into its density inio
gravity, is equal to dz x ^ X g ; and because p decreases as z
increases, we have,
dp= — dz X S X g (336)
From Maeiotte's law we have,
p:P::8:D, or, P = ^^ (337)
Dividing (336) by (337), we find,
, f=-?^^ (338)
Integrating (338) from the bottom of the column to the
top, and denoting the height AA' hj h, we have,
IP' -IP = - ^h, or, IP - IP'.= ^h, . . . (339)
in which I denotes the Naperian logarithm. Multiplying
both members of (339) by M, the modulus of the common
system, and reducing, we have,
%(J) = ^'»,
and solving, we find.
340.] MECHANICS OF GASES AND VAPOKS. 283
A =
log (p), (340)
MDg
in which log denotes the common logarithm.
For the case assumed, the pressures at A and A' are
measured by the heights of the mercurial columns at these
stations; denoting these heights by H and H', we have
finally,
'' = rng'^a (|> (341)
which is the fundamental barometrical formula. In
applying formula (341) to practice, a great number of cor-
rections must be made. It must be corrected for the tem-
perature of the stratum of air between the stations A and
A' ; it must be corrected for difEerence of temperature of the
columns of mercury at the two stations; it must be cor-
rected for the variation of gravity between the level of the
sea and each of the two stations ; and it must be corrected
for the variation in bhe amount of aqueous vapor at the two
stations. The method of making these corrections does not
fall within the scope of this treatise.
For the complete formula, as used in geodesy, the reader
is referred to the exhaustive treatise, " On the Use of the
Barometer in Surveys and Reconnaissances," by Colonel R. S.
Williamson, U. S. Engineers, published by the Engineer
Department for the use of the army engineers ; and also to
the admirable tables of Gutot, published by the Smithsonian
Institution. In both of these works elaborate tables are
given, by means of which the process of barometrical leveling
is made comparatively simple. In "Professional Papers,
No. 12," published for the use of the Corps of U. S. Engi-
neers, pp. 146-180, may be found Plantamoue's modi-
fication of Bessel's formula, arranged and adapted to En-
glish measures, with a complete set of tables for its use, by
Colonel Williamson.
284
MECHANICS.
[343.
Work Due to the Expansion of a Gas or Vapor.
307. Let tlie gas or vapor be confined in a cylinder
closed at is lower end, and having a
piston working air-tight. When the
gas occupies a portion of the cylinder
whose height is h, denote the pressure
on each square inch of the piston by p ;
when the gas expands, so that the alti-
tude of the column becomes x, denote
the pressure on a square inch by p'.
Since the volumes of the gas, under
these suppositions, are proportional to their altitudes, we
shall have, from Mariottb's law.
—
. -iW
Pig. 168.
whence
p : p :: X : h;
xp' =ph (343)
If we suppose^ and h to be constant, and x and^' to vary,
the above equation will be that of an equilateral hyperbola,
whose asymptotes are ^Cand AM.
From (343) we have,
, ph
^ X
The elementary quantity of work performed on each square
inch of the piston whilst the gas is expanding from the
height X to the height x -f - dx is equal to p' dx ; denoting
this by dQ', we have, after substituting for p' its value from
the preceding equation,
dQ' = ph — .
Integrating between the limits h and x, we have.
343.] MECHAS-ICS OF GASES AND VAPORS. 285
Q' = ph {Ix — IJi) = ph . li^^, (343)
in which I denotes the Xaperian logarithm.
In (343), Q' is the quantity of work performed on each
square inch of the piston ; if we denote the area of the piston
in square inches by A and the total quantity of work by Q,
we have, after substituting for ^ its value taken from (342),
ih
Q = Aph . Z (J,) (344)
If we denote by c the number of cubic feet of gas when
the pressure on a square inch of the piston is p, and sup-
pose it to expand till the pressure is p', we shall have c z=
Ah, or, if A is expressed in square feet, we shall have
Ah , 144c „,. . ,„... .
c — jj-^, or A = -J- . This, m (344), gives
Q = Uicp.l{^), (345)
which gives the quantity of work of c cubic feet of gas whilst
expanding from a pressure of p pounds on a square inch to a
pressure of p' pounds.
Steam.
308. If water be exposed to the atmosphere, at ordinary
temperatures, a portion is converted into vapor, which mixes
with the atmosphere, constituting one of the permanent ele-
ments of the aerial ocean. The tension of watery vapor thus
formed, is very slight, and the atmosphere soon ceases to
absorb any more. If the temperature of the water be raised,
an additional amount of vapor is evolved, and of greater
tension. When the temperature is raised to that point at
which the tension of the vapor is equal to that of the atmos-
286 MECHASriCS.
phere, ebullition commences, and the vaporization goes on
with great rapidity. If heat be added beyond the point of
ebullition, neither the water nor the vapor will increase in
temperature till all of the water is converted into steam.
When water is converted into steam under a pressure of
one atmosphere, each cubic inch is expanded into about 1700
cubic inches of steam, of the temperature of 212° ; or, since
a cubic foot contains 1728 cubic inches, we may say, in round
numbers, that a cubic inch of water is converted into
a cubic foot of steam.
If water is converted into steam under a greater or less
pressure than one atmosphere, the density will be increased
or diminished, and, consequently, the volume will be dimin-
ished or increased. The temperature being also increased or
diminished, the increaso of density or decrease of volume will
not be exactly proportional to the increase of pressure ; but,
for purposes of approximation, we may consider the densities
as directly and the volumes as inversely proportional to the
pressures under which the steam is generated. Under this
hypothesis, if a cubic inch of water be evaporated under a
pressure of a half atmosphere, it will afford two cubic feet of
steam ; if generated under a pressure of two atmospheres, it
will only afford a half . cubic foot of steam.
"Work of Steam.
309. When water is converted into steam, a certain
amount of work is generated, and, from what has been shown,
this amount of work is very nearly the same, whatever may
be the temperature at which the water is evaporated.
Suppose a cylinder, •whose cross-section is one square inch,
to contain a cubic inch of water, above which is an air-tight
piston, that may be loaded with weights at pleasure. In the
first place, if the piston is pressed down by a weight of 15
pounds, and the inch of water converted into steam, the
MECHANICS OF GASES AKD VAPOES. 287
weight will be raised to the height of 1738 inches, or 144
feet. Hence, the quantity of work is 144 x 15, or, 2160
units. Again, if the piston be loaded with a weight of 30
pounds, the conversion of water into steam will give but 864
cubic inches, and the weight will be raised through 72 feet.
In this ease, the quantity of work will be 72 x 30, or 2160
units, as before. We conclude, therefore, that the quantity
of work is the same, or nearly so, whatever may be the press-
ure under which the steam is generated. We also conclude,
that the quantity of work is nearly proportional to the fuel
consumed.
Besides the quantity of work developed by simply convert-
ing an amount of water into steam, a further quantity of
work is developed by allowing the steam to expand after
entering the cylinder. This principle is made use of in
steam-engines working expansively.
To find the quantity of work developed by steam acting ex-
pansively. Let AB represent a cylinder, closed at
A, and having an air-tight piston B. Suppose the
steam to enter at the bottom of the cylinder, and to
push the piston upward to C, and then suppose
the opening at which the steam enters to be closed.
If the piston is not too heavily loaded, • the steam
will continue to expand, and the piston will be raised Kg. ]64.
to some position, B. The expansive force of the
steam wiU obey Makiotte's law, and the quantity of work
due to expansion will be given by equation (344).
Denote the area of the piston in square inches, by A ; the
pressure of the steam on each square inch, up to the moment
when the communication is cut off, by p ; the distance A O,
through which the piston moves before the steam is cut off,
by h ; and the distance AB, by nJi.
If we denote the pressure on each square inch, when the
piston arrives at B, by p', we shall have, by Maeiotte's law.
288 MECHANICS. t^*®-
P
p : p' : : nh : h, .•. ^ =
n
an expression which gives the limiting value of the load of
the piston.
The quantity of work due to expansion being denoted by
Q', we shall have, from equation (344),
Q' = ApTi X l[^) = Aph.l{n) (346)
If we denote the quantity of work of the steam, whilst the
piston is rising to G, by Q", we shall have,
Q" = Aph.
Denoting the total quantity of work during the entire stroke
of the piston, by Q, we shall have,
Q' +Q''^Q = Aph[l + l{n)] (347)
Efflux of a Gas or Vapor.
310. Suppose the gas to escape from a small orifice, and
denote its velocity by v. Denote the weight of a cubic foot
of the gas by w, and the number of cubic feet discharged in
one second by c, then will the mass escaping in one second,
CZO CZD
be equal to — , and its kinetic energy will be equal to ^v^.
But, from Art. 148, the kinetic energy is equal to the accu-
mulated work. If, therefore, we denote the accumulated
work by Q, we shall have.
But the accumulated work is due to the expansion of the
348.] MECHANICS OF GASES AND VAPORS. 289
gas, and if we denote the pressure within the orifice by p,
and without, by^', we shall have, from Art. 207,
Equating the second members, we have,
whence.
Substituting for g, its value, 32^ ft., we have, after reduc-
tion.
When the difference between p and p' is small, the pre-
ceding formula can be simplified.
p p p'
Since ^ = 1 + - — ^ , we have, from the logarithmic for-
mula.
When p — p' is very small, the second, and all succeeding
terms of the- development, may be neglected, in comparison
with the first term. Hence,
SubstitutJTig, in the formula above deduced, we have.
V w
v = OH/^xl^-,
290 MECHANICS. r349.
or, since — , is, iinder the supposition just made, equal to 1,
we have, finally,
^=^V^ ^'^'^
CoefBcient of Efflnx.
311. When air issues from an orifice, the section of the
current undergoes a change of form, analogous to the con-
traction of the vein in liquids, and for similar reasons. If we
denote the coefficient of efflux by Ic, the area of the orifice by
A, and the quantity of air delivered in n seconds by Q, we
shall have, from equation (348),
Vi'fF)
e=96i.^y^i^|,j (360)
In which w is to be expressed in the same unit as p and p'.
According to Koch, the value of h is equal to .58 when the
orifice is in a thin plate; equal to .74 when the gas issues
through a tube 6 times as long as it is wide ; and equal to .85
when it issues through a conical nozzle 5 times as long as the
diameter of the orifice, and whose elements make an angle of
6° with the axis.
X.— HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC MACHINES.
Defiuitions.
313. Hydraulic machines are machines for raising and
distributing water, as pumps, siphons, hydraulic rams, and
the like. The name is also applied to machines in which
water power is the motor, or in which water is employed to
transmit pressures, as water-wheels, hydraulic presses, and
the like.
Pneumatic machines are machines to rarefy and con-
dense air, or to impart motion to air, as air-pumps, ventilating
blowers, and the like. The name is also applied to those
machines in which the kinetic energy of air is the motive
power, such as windwills, and the like.
Water Pumps.
313. A water pump is a machine for raising water from
a lower to a higher leyel, by the aid of atmospheric pressure.
Three separate principles are employed in pumps : the suck-
ing, the lifting, and the forcing principle. Pumps are
named according to the principles employed.
Sucking and Lifting. Pump.
314. This pump consists of a barrel. A, to the lower ex-
tremity of which is attached a sucking-pipe, B, leading to
a reservoir. An air-tight piston, C, is worked up and down
in the barrel by a lever, E, attached to a piston-rod, Z* ; P is
a valve opening upward, which, when the pump is at rest,
closes by its own weight. This valve is called the piston-
293
MECHANICS.
Pig. 165.
valve. A second valve, G, also opening upward, is placed
at the junction of the pipe with the barrel; this is called
the sleeping-valve. The space, LM,
through which the piston moves up and
down, is tlie play of the piston.
To explain the action of the pump :
suppose the piston to be in its lowest
position, and everything in equilibrium.
If the extremity of the lever, E, be de-
pressed, and the piston raised, the air in
the lower part of the barrel is rarefied,
and that in the pipe, B, by virtue of its
greater tension, opens the valve, and a
portion escapes into the barrel. The air in the pipe', thus
rarefied, exerts less pressure on the water in the reservoir than
the external air, and, consequently, the water rises in the
pipe, until the tension of the internal air, plus the weight of
the column of water raised, is equal to the tension of the ex-
ternal air ; the valve, G, then closes by its own weight.
If the pistol} be again depressed to the lowest limit, the air
in the lower part of the barrel is compressed, its tension be-
comes greater than that of the external air, the valve, P, is
forced open, and a portion of the air escapes. If the piston
be raised once more, the water, for the same reason as before,
rises still higher in the pipe, and after a fex double strokes
of the piston, the air is completely exhausted from beneath
the piston, the water passes through the piston-valve, and
finally escapes at the spout, F.
The water is raised to the piston by the pressure of the air
on the surface of the water in the reservoir ; hence, the piston
should not be placed at a greater distance above the water in
the reservoir, than the height at which the pressure of the air
will sustain a column of water. In fact, it should be placed
a little lower than this limit. The specific gravity of mer-
HTDEAULIC AND PNEUMATIC MACHINES. 293
cury being about 13.5, the height of a column of water that
will counterbalance the pressure of the atmosphere may be
found by multiplying the height of the barometric column
by ISf
At the level of the sea the average height of the barometric
column is 2^ feet ; hence, the theoretical height to which
water can be raised by the principle of suction alone, is a
little less than 34 feet.
The water having passed through the piston-valve, may be
raised to any height by the lifting principle, the only limita-
tion being the strength of the pump.
There are certain relations that must exist between the play
of the piston and its height above the water in the reservoir,
in order that the water may be raised to the piston ; if the
play is too small, it will happen after a few strokes of the
piston, that the air in the barrel is not suflBciently compressed
to open the piston- valve ; when this state of affairs takes
place, the water ceases to rise.
To investigate the relation that should exist between the
play and the height of the piston above the water. Denote
the play of the piston by p, the distance from the surface of
the water in the reservoir to the highest position of the piston
by a, and the height at which the water ceases to rise by x.
The distance from the water in the pump to the highest po-
sition of the piston will be a — x, and the distance to the
lowest position of the piston a — p — x. Denote the height
at which the atmospheric pressure sustains a column of water
in a vacuum, by h, and the weight of a column of water,
whose base is the cross-section of the pump, and altitude is 1,
by w ; then will wh denote the pressure of the atmosphere
exerted upward through the water in the reservoir and pump.
When the piston is at its lowest position, the pressure of
the confined air must be equal to that of the external atmos-
phere ; that is, to wh. When the piston is at its highest
294 MECHANICS. [351.
position, the confined air will be rarefied, the volume occupied
being proportional to its height. Denoting the pressure of
this rarefied air by wh', we shall have, from Mariotte's law,
wh : wh' :: a — x : a — p — x.
As the water does not rise when the piston is in its highest
position, the pressure of the rarefied air plus the weight of
the column already raised, will be equal to the pressure of the
external atmosphere ; or,
ivli — f- wx = wh.
a — x
Solving this with respect to to x, we have,
a ± Va^ — 4pA
(351)
Or
If, 4ph > a« ; or, i' > j^ ,
the value of x is imaginary, and there is no point at which
the water ceases to rise. Hence, the above inequality ex-
presses the relation that must exist, in order that the pump
may be efEective. This condition, expressed in words, gives
the following rule :
The -play of the piston must be greater than the square
of the distance from the loaier in the reservoir, to the
highest position of the piston, divided by four times the
height at which the atmosphere will support a column
of water in a vacuum.
Let it be required to find the least play of the piston, when its highest
position is 16 feet above the water in the reservoir, and the barometer at
28 inches.
HTDEAULIG AND PNEFMATIC MACHINES. 295
In this case,
a = 16 fl., and A = 28 in. x 13J = 378 in. =Z\\ ft.
Hence, P>mfl-< or> P>Zv\fi-
To find the quantity of work required to make a double
stroke of the piston, after the- water has reached the spout.
In depressing the piston, no force is required, except that
necessary to overcome inertia and friction. Neglecting these
for the present, the quantity of work in the downward stroke,
may be regarded as 0. In raising the piston, its upper sur-
face is pressed downward, by the pressure of the atmosphere,
wh, plus the weight of the column of water from the piston
to the spout ; and it is pressed upward, by the pressure of the
atmosphere, transmitted through the pump, minus the weight
of a column of water, whose cross-section is that of the barrel,
and whose altitude is th« .distance from the piston, to the
water in the reservoir. If we subtract the latter from the
former, the difEerence will be the downward pressure. This
difEerence is equal to the weight of a column of water, whose
base is the cross-section of the barrel, and whose height is
the distance of the spout above the reservoir. Denoting this
height by H, the pressure is equal to wH. The path through
which the pressure is exerted during the ascent of the piston,
is the play of the piston, or p. Denoting the quantity of
work required, by Q, we shall have,
Q = wpH.
But wp is the weight of a volume of water, whose base is
the cross-section of the barrel, and whose altitude is the play
of the piston. Hence, Q is equal to the quantity of work
necessary to raise this volume of water from the level of the
reservoir to the spout. This volume is evidently equal to that
actually delivered at each double stroke of the piston. Hence,
the quantity of work expended in pumping, with the sucking
296
MECHAinCS.
and lifting pump, hurtful resistances being neglected, is equal
to the quantity of work necessary to lift the amount of water,
actually delivered, from the level of the reservoir to the spout.
In addition to this, a sufficient amount of power must be ex-
erted to overcome hui-tful resistances.
The disadvantage of this pump, is the irregularity with
which the force acts, being in depressing the piston, and a
maximum jn raising it. This is an important objection when
machinery is employed in pumping ; but it may be partially
overcome, by using two pumps, so arranged, that one piston
ascends as the other descends. Another objection to the use
of this pump, is the irregularity of flow, the inertia of the col-
umn of water having to be overcome at each upward stroke.
Modification of tke Lifting Pump.
315. To correct the irregularity of flow, it is customary to
attach to the piston-rod a cylindrical
piece, P, called a plunger. This
piece, which moves up and down with
the piston, is so adjusted as to displace
in its descent one half the quantity of
water that is delivered at each double
stroke of the piston. Then, during the
up stroke of the piston, an amount of
water will be lifted up to the spout
equal to that which \% forced, up by the
plunger in the down stroke. In this
manner the flow is rendered nearly
uniform, and the rate of work of the
power is made nearly constant. Pig. los.
Sucking' and Forcing Pump.
31.6. This pump consists of a barrel. A, with a sucking
pipe, B, and a sleeping-valve, G, as in the pump just dis-
HYDEAtTLIO AND PKBUMATIC MACHINES.
297
cussed. The piston, G, is solid, and is worked up and down
by a lever, E, and a piston-rod, D. At the bottom of the bar-
rel, a pipe leads to an air-vessel, K, through a second sleep-
ing-valve, F, which opens upward, and closes by its own
weight. A delivery-pipe, H, enters the air-vessel at the
top, and terminates near the bottom.
To explain the action of this pump, suppose the piston, C,
to be in its lowest position. If the piston be raised to its
highest position, the air in the barrel is rarefied, its tension
is diminished, the air in the tube, B, thrusts open the valve,
and a portion escapes into the barrel.
The pressure of the external air then
forces water up the pipe, B, until the
tension of the rarefied air, plus the
weight of the water raised, is equal to
the tension of the external air. An
equilibrium being produced, the valve,
G, closes by its own weight.
If the piston be depressed, the air in
the barrel is condensed, its tension in-
creases till it becomes greater than that
o'f the external air, when the valve, F,
is thrust open, and a portion escapes
through the delivery-pipe, H. After a few double strokes of
the piston, the water rises through the valve, G, and, as the
piston descends, is forced into the air-vessel, the air is con-
densed in the upper part of the vessel, and, acting by its
elastic force, urges a portion of the water up the delivery-
pipe and out at the spout, P. The object of the air-vessel is,
to keep up a continued stream through the pipe, H, otherwise
it would be necessary to overcome the inertia of the entire
column of water in the pipe at every double stroke. The flow
having commenced, a volume of water is delivered from the
spout, at each double stroke, equal to that of a cylinder whose
Ks;. 167.
298 MECHANICS.
base is the area of the piston, and whose altitude is the play
of the piston.
The same condition as to the play of the piston must exist
as in the sucking and lifting pump.
To find the quantity of work consumed at each double
stroke, after the flow has become regular, hurtful resistance
being neglected :
When the piston is descending, it is pressed downward by
the tension of the air on its upper surface, and upward by the
tension of the atmosphere, transmitted through the delivery-
pipe, plus the weight of a column of water whose base is the
area of the piston, and whose altitude is the distance of the
spout above the piston. This distance is variable during the
stroke, but its mean value is the distance of the middle of the
play below the spout . The difference between these pressures is
exerted upward, and is equal to the weight of a column of water
whose base is the area of the piston, and whose altitude is the
distance from the middle of the play to tie spout. The distance
through which the force is exerted, is the play of the piston.
Denoting the quantity of work during the descending
stroke, by Q', the weight of a column of water, whose base is
the area of the piston, and altitude is 1, by w, and the height
of the spout above the middle of the play, by h', we have,
Q' — wh' X p.
When the piston is ascending, it is pressed downward by
the tension of the atmosphere on its upper surface, and up-
ward by the tension of the atmosphere, transmitted through
the water in the reservoir and pump, minus the weight of a
column of water whose base is the area of the piston, and
whose altitude is the height of the piston above the reservoir.
This height is variable, but its mean value is the height of
the middle of the play above the reservoir. The distance
through which this force is exerted, is the play of the piston.
352.]
HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC MACHINES.
399
Denoting the quantity of work during the ascending stroke,
by '§", and the height of the middle of the play above the
reservoir, by h", we have,
Q" = wJi" X p.
Denoting the entire quantity of work during a double stroke,
by Q, we have,
Q=Q' +Q" = wp {h' + h") (352)
But wp is the weight of a volume of water, whose base is
the piston, and whose altitude is the play ; that is, it is the
weight of the volume delivered at each double stroke.
The quantity, h' + h", is the height of the spout above the
reservoir. Hence, the work expended is equal to that required
to raise the volume delivered from the level of the reservoir to
the spout. To this must be added the work necessary to over-
come hurtful resistances, as friction, etc.
If Ji' = h", we have, Q' = Q" ; that is, the quantity of
work during the ascending stroke, is equal to that during the
descending stroke. Hence, the work of the motor is more
nearly uniform, when the middle of the play is at equal dis-
tances from the reservoir and spout.
Forcing Pnmp with Plunger.
217. A forcing pump may be constructed as shown in Fig.
168. The barrel of the pump. A, is
extended into a lateral cylinder, JT, in
which is a plunger that is worked back
and forth through a packing-box, B,
by means of the lever, LN. The
sucking-pipe, S, and the delivery-
pipe, D, are separated from the barrel
by sleeping valves, G and F, opening up-
ward and closing by their own weight. Fig. les.
300
MECHANICS.
The method of filling the pump is as follows : When the
plunger is thrust toward A in the figure, the air in the
barrel is condensed, forces open the valve, F, and a portion
escapes into the delivery-pipe ; when the plunger is drawn
back the air in the barrel is rarefied, the greater tension of
the air in the sucking-pipe opens the valve, G, and the
water rises to a certain height in D. A few double strokes
fill the pump with water, after which there will be delivered
at each double stroke a quantity of water whose volume is
equal to that of a cylinder whose diameter is equal to that of
the plunger, and whose altitude is equal to the 'play of the
plunger.
In the pump just described there is no air-chamber, and as
a consequence 'the flow is irregular. To prevent binding, the
lever, ZiV, is connected with the plunger, P, by means of a
short link, having a hinge joint at each extremity. A similar
arrangement is made for like purpose in the pumps previously
described.
Fire-Engine.
318. The fire-engine is a double sucking and forcing
pump, the piston-rods being so connected, that when one
piston ascends, the other descends. The sucking and delivery
pipes are made of leather, and attached to the machine by
metallic screw- joints.
The figure exhibits a cross-
section of the essential parts
of an ordinary fire-engine.
A, A', are the barrels, the
pistons are connected by
rods with the lever, JH, E';
B is the sucking-pipe, ter-
minating in a reservoir from
which the water may enter jig ^g
HTDEAULIC AND PNEUMATIC MACHINES.
301
either barrel through the valTee, G, 0'; K is the air-vessel,
common to both pumps, and communicating with them by
valyes, F, I"; H is the delivery-pipe.
It is mounted on wheels for convenience of locomotion.
The lever, E, E', is worked by rods at right angles to the
lever, so arranged that several men can apply their strength
at once. The action of the pump differs in no respect from
that of the forcing pump ; but when the instrument is
worked vigorously, a large quantity of water is forced into
the air-vessel, the tension of the air is much augmented, and
its elastic force, thus brought into play, propels the water to
a considerable distance from the delivery-pipe. It is this
capacity of throwing a jet of water to a great distance, that
gives to the engine its value for extinguishing fires.
A pump similar to the fire-engine, is often used, under the
name of the double-action forcing-pump, for other pur-
poses.
The Rotary Pump.
319. The rotary pump is a modification of the sucking
and forcing pump. Its construc-
tion will be understood from the
drawing, which represents a sec-
tion through the axis of the suck-
ing-pipe, at right angles to the
axis of the rotating portion.
J is a ring of metal, revolving
about an axis ; D, D, is a second
ring of metal, concentric with
the first, and forming with it an
intermediate annular space. This
space communicates with the suck-
ing-pipe, K, and the delivery-pipe, L. Four radial paddles,
C, are so disposed as to slide backward and forward through
suitable openings in the ring A, and are moved around with
Kg. 170.
303 MECHANICS.
it. G* is a guide, fastened to the end of the cylinder inclos-
ing the revolving apparatus, and cut as represented in the
figure ; E, E, are springs, attached to the ring, Z>, and acting,
by their elastic force, to press the paddles firmly against the
guide. These springs do not impede the flow of water from
the pipe, K, into the pipe, L.
When the axis, 0, revolves, each paddle, as it passes the
partition, is pressed against the guide, but is forced out again,
by the form of the guide, against the wall, D. Each paddle
drives the air in front of it in the direction of the arrow-head,
and finally expels it through the pipe, L. The air behind
the paddle is rarefied, and the pressure of the external air
forces a column of water up the pipe. After a few revolu-
tions, the air is entirely exhausted from the pipe, K. The
water enters the channel, C, C, and is forced up the pipe, L,
from which it escapes by a spout. The work expended in
raising a volume of water to the spout, by this pump, is equal
to that required to lift it from the level of the cistern to the
spout. This may be shown in the same manner as was ex-
plained under the head of the sucking and forcing pump.
To this quantity of work, must be added the work necessary
to overcome hurtful resistances.
A machine, similar to the rotary pump, is constructed for
exhausting foul air from a mine ; or, by reversing the direc-
tion of rotation, to force fresh air to the bottom of the
mine.
The Hydraulic Press.
330. The hydraulic press is a machine for exerting a
great pressure through a small space. It is used in compress-
ing seeds to obtain oil, in packing hay and other goods, also
in raising great weights. Its. construction, though requiring
the use of a forcing-pump, depends upon the principle of
equal pressures, (Art. 167).
353.]
HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC MACHINES.
303
u
H
Fig. 171.
By
It consists of two cylinders, A
and B, each provided with a solid
piston. The cylinders communicate
by a pipe, C, whose entrance to the
larger cylinder is closed by a sleep-
ing valve, U. The smaller cylinder
communicates with the reservoir JS^,
by a sucking-pipe 11, whose upper
extremity is closed by a sleeping
valve, Z>. The piston £, is worked by the lever, G.
raising and depressing the lever G, the water is raised from
the reservoir and forced into the cylinder, A ; and when the
space below the piston, F, is filled, a force is exerted up-
ward, as many times greater than that applied to B, as the
area of F is greater than B (Art. 167). This force may be
utilized in compressing a body, L, between the piston and
the frame of the press.
Denote the area of the liarger piston, by P, of the smaller,
by p, the pressure applied to B, by /, and that exerted on
Fj^yF; and we shall have, .
F=f^
P
If we denote the longer arm of the lever G, by L, the
shorter arm by I, and the force applied at the extremity of
the longer arm by K, we have, from the principle of the
lever,
KL
F:f:: P : p,
(353)
E:f::l:L,
■f--T-
(354)
Substituting above, we have,
PEL
F^
pi
(355)
To illustrate, let the area of the larger piston be 100 square inches,
that of the smaller piston 1 square inch, the longer arm of the lever
304 MECHANICS.
30 inches, the shorter arm 2 inches, and let a force of 100 pounds be
applied at the end of the longer arm of the lever ; to find the press-
ure on F.
From the conditions,
P = 100, K= 100, L = %0,p = 1, and I = 3.
Hence,
_ 100 X 100 X 30 -.-nnnn ii.
F = = 150,000 lbs.
a
We have not taken into account the hurtful resistances, lience the
pressure of 150,000 pounds must be somewhat diminished.
The volume of water forced from the smaller to the larger
cylinder, during a single descent of the piston, B, will
occupy, in the two cylinders, spaces whose heights are in-
versely as the areas of the pistons. Hence, the path, over
which / is exerted, is to the path over which F is exerted, as
P is to p. Or, denoting these paths by s and S, we have,
s: S :: P : p;
or, since P : p :: F : f, we shall have,
s : S :: F : f, .: /.s = i?W.
That is, the work of the power and resistance are equal, a
principle that holds good in all machines.
Examples.
1. The cross-section of a sucking and forcing pump is 6 square feet,
the play of the piston 3 feet, and the. height of the spout, above the
reservoir, 50 feet. What must be the effective horse-power of an engine
to impart 30 double strokes per minute, hurtful resistances being
neglected ?
Solution. — The number of units of work required to be performed
each minute, is equal to
6 X 3 X 50 X 62J X 30 = 1,687,500 Ib.ft.
Hence,
HYDRAULIC AND PlfEUMATIC MACHINES.
305
3. In a hydrostatic press, the areas of the pistons are, 3 and 400 square
inches, and the arms of the leyer are, 1 and 30 inches. Required the
pressure on the larger piston for each pound of pressure on the longer
arm of lever. Am. 4,000 lbs.
3. The areas of the pistons of a hydrostatic press are, 3 and 300 square
inches, and the shorter arm of the lever is one inch. "What must be the
length of the longer arm, that a force of 1 lb. may produce a pressure of
1000 Z6s.? Ans. 10 inches.
Storing Up the Work of Hydraulic Pressure.
231. In certain branches of industry it becomes necessary
from time to time to handle objects of enormous weight.
Work of this kind is most advantageously performed by means
of the hydraulic crane. The description of the crane itself
does not fall within the scope of this work, but the manner
in which the motive force is generated and stored up is an
immediate application of the principle of the hydraulic press
just described. The diagram shows the essential parts of
what is called the accumulator.
The barrel. A, rests firmly on a solid bed-plate, B, which
also supports the frame FOE. A
heavy ram, R, is free to move up and
down in the barrel, being guided by a
cross-piece, K, which is notched on to
the posts E and F, This cross-piece
carries a heavy weight, W, usually
of scrap iron, which may be placed
upon K, or suspended from it in an
annular basket. At P is a pipe lead-
ing into A, from a powerful forcing
pump, and provided with a valve, V,
opening inward. At D is a pipe lead-
ing /t-owj A to the machine that oper-
ates the crane ; it may be opened and closed by a stop-cock, ;S'.
The stop-cock, 8, being closed, the pump forces water into
Fig ira.
306 MECHAITICS.
A, raising up the ram and its superposed weight. In some
cases the pressure on the water in A is carried as high as 700
lbs. on a square inch. When the stored up work is to be ap-
plied, the cock 8 is opened, and the water enters the cylinder,
where its enormous pressure is utilized in working the crane.
The principles here explained may be applied to any nla-
chine where great force is required for a comparatively short
period of time.
The Siphon.
333. The siphon is a bent tube, fof transferring a liquid
from a higher to a lower level, over an intermediate
elevation. The siphon consists of two branches, AB
and BG, of which the outer one is the longer. To
use the instrument, the tube is filled with the liquid,
the end of the longer branch being stopped with the
finger, or a stop-cock ; in which case, the pressure
of the atmosphere prevents the liquid from escaping
at the other end. The instrument is then inverted,
the end, G, being submerged in the liquid, and the
stop removed from A. The liquid will flow through the
tube, and the flow will continue till the level of the liquid in
the reservoir reaches the mouth of the tube, G.
To find the velocity with which water will issue from the
siphon, let us consider an infinitely small layer at the orifice,
A. This layer is pressed downward, by the tension of the
atmosphere exerted on the surface of the reservoir, minus the
weight of the water in the branch, BD, plus the weight of
the water in the branch, BA. It is pressed upward by the
tension of the atmosphere. The difference of these forces, is
the weight of the water in DA, and the velocity of the stratum
will be due to that height. Denoting the vertical height of
DA, by h, we shall have, for the velocity,
V = V2ffh.
HTDBAULIC AND PNEUMATIC MACHINES. 307
This is the theoretical Telocity, but it is neyer quite realized
in practice, on account of resistances, that hare been neglected
in the preceding investigation.
The siphon may be filled by applying the mouth to
the end. A, and exhausting the air by suction. '' The
tension of the atmosphere, on the upper surface of
the reservoir, presses the water up the tube, and fills
it, after which the flow goes on as before. Sometimes,
a sucking-tube, AD, is inserted near the opening,
A, rising to the bend of the siphon. In this case,
the opening. A, is closed, and the air exhausted through the
sucking-tube, AD, after which the flow goes on as before.
The Wurtemburg Siphon.
333. In the "Wurtemburg siphon, the ends of the tube
are bent twice, at right angles, as shown in the
figure. The advantage of this is, that the tube, (^
once filled, remains so, as long as the plane of its
axis is kept vertical. The siphon may be lifted out
and replaced at pleasure, thereby stopping and re- vsJ Iti/
producing the flow at will. '^'
It is to be observed that the siphon is only effective when
the distance from the highest point of the tube to the level
of the water in the reservoir is less than the height at which
the atmospheric pressure sustains a column of water in a
vacuum. This will, generally, be less than 34 feet.
The Intennittin^ Siphon.
334. The intermitting siphon is represented in the
figure. AB is a curved tube issuing from the bottom of a
reservoir. The reservoir is supplied with water by a tube, E,
having a smaller bore than the siphon.
308
MECHANICS.
To explain its action, suppose the reser- b
Toir to be empty, and the tube, E, to be
open ; as soon as the reservoir is filled to
the level, CD, the water begins to flow
from the opening, B, and the flow once
commenced, continues till the level of the
reservoir is reduced to CD', through the
opening, A. The flow then ceases till the
cistern is again filled to GD, and so on as
before.
The instrument just described is often called Tantalus'
Cup.
Intermitting Springs.
335. Let A represent a subterranean cavity, communi-
cating with the surface of the earth by a channel, ABC, bent
like a siphon. Suppose the reservoir to
be fed by percolation through the crev-
ices, or by a small channel, D. When
the water in the reservoir rises to the
horizontal plane, BD, the flow com-
mences at G, and, if the channel is
sufiiciently large, the flow continues till the water is reduced
to the level plane through G. An intermission then occurs
till the reservoir is again filled ; and so on, intermittingly.
Kg. 177.
Siphon of Constant Flow.
336. We have seen that the velocity of efilux depends on
the height of water in the reservoir above the external open-
ing of the siphon. When the water is drawn from the reser-
voir, the surface sinks, this height diminishes, and, conse-
quently, the velocity continually diminishes.
If, however, the shorter branch, GD, be passed through a
cork large enough to float the siphon, the instrument will sink
I HYDEAULIC AKD PNEUMATIC MACHINES. 309
as the upper surface is depressed, the height of DA will
remain constant, and, consequently, the flow will be uniform
till the siphon comes in contact with the upper edge of the
reservoir. By suitably adjusting the siphon in the cork, the
velocity of efflux can be increased or decreased within certain
limits. In this manner, any desired quantity of the fluid can
be drawn off in a given time.
The siphon is used in the arts, for decanting liquids. It is
also employed to draw a portion of a liquid from the interior
of a vessel when that liquid is overlaid by one of less specific
gravity.
The Hydraulic Ram.
327. The hydraulic ram is a machine for raising water
by means of shocks caused by the sudden stoppage of a
stream of water.
It consists of a reservoir, £, supplied by an inclined pipe,
A ; at the upper surface of the reservoir, is an orifice closed
by a valve, D ; this valve is kept
in place by a metallic basket im-
mediately below the orifice ; (? is an
air-vessel comfnunicating with the
reservoir by an opening F, with
a spherical valve, U ; this valve ,^^
closes the orifice F, except when ^^5>^!Te
u:
3
forced upward, in which case its
motion is restrained by a frame- Fig. its.
work or cage ; ^ is a delivery-pipe entering the air-vessel
at its upper part, and terminating near the bottom.
To explain the action of the instrument, suppose it empty,
and the parts in equilibrium. If a current of water be ad-
mitted to the reservoir, through the pipe, A, the reservoir is
soon filled, and the water commences rushing out at D ; the
impulse of the water forces the valve, D, upward, and closes
310 MECHANICS.
the opening ; the velocity of the water in the reservoir is
checked ; the reaction forces open the valve, U, and a por-
tion of the water enters the air-chamber, G ; the force of the
shock having been expended, the valves both fall by their
own weight ; a second shock takes place, as before ; an ad-
ditional quantity of water is forced into the air-vessel, and so
on continuously. As the water is forced into the air-vessel,
the air becomes compressed ; and acting by its elastic force,
urges a stream of water up the pipe, U. The shocks occur
in rapid succession, and thus a constant stream is kept up.
To explain the use of the valve, P, it may be remarked
that water absorbs more air under a greater, than under a
smaller pressure. Hence, as it passes through the air-
chamber, a portion of the contained air is taken up by the
water and carried out through the pipe, II. But each time
that the valve, B, falls, there is a tendency to a vacuum in
the upper part of the reservoir, in consequence of the rush
of the fluid to escape through the opening. The pressure of
the external air then forces open the valve P, a portion of
air enters, and is afterward forced up with the water into the
vessel, G, to keep up the supply.
The hydraulic ram is only used to raise sm^l quantities of
water, as for the supply of a house, or garden. Only a small
fraction of the fluid that enters the supply-pipe actually
passes out through the delivery-pipe ; but if the head of
water is pretty large, a column may be raised to a great
height. Water is often raised, in this manner, to the highest
parts of lofty buildings.
Sometimes, an additional air-vessel is introduced over the
valve, JS, to deaden the shock of the valve in its play.
Archimedes' Screw.
338. This is a machine for raising water through small
heights, and, in its simplest form, it consists of a tube wound
HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC MACHINES.
311
spirally around a cylinder. The cylinder is mounted so that
its axis is oblique to the horizon, the lower end dipping into
the reservoir. When the cylinder is turned on its axis, the
lower end of the tube describes the circumference of a circle,
whose plane is perpendicular to the axis. When the mouth
of the tube comes to the level of the axis and begins to ascend,
there is a certain quantity of water in the tube, which con-
tinues to occupy the lowest part of the spire ; and, if the cyl-
inder is properly inclined to the horizon, this flow is toward
the upper end of the tube. At each revolution, a quantity of
water enters the tube, and that already in the tube is raised,
higher and higher, till, at last, it flows from the upper end of
the tube.
The Chain Pump.
229. The chain pump is an instrument for raising water
through small elevations.
It consists of an endless chain passing over wheels, A and
B, having their axes horizontal, one be-
low the surface of the water, and the
other above the spout of the pump.
Attached to this chain, and at right
angles to it, are circular disks, fitting
the tube, CD. If the cylinder A, be
turned in the proper direction, the
buckets or disks rise through the tube
CD, driving the water before them, un-
til it reaches the spout C, and escapes.
One great objection to this machine is,
the difficulty of making the disks fit the tube. Hence, there
is a constant leakage, requiring great additional expenditure
of force.
.Sometimes the body of the pump is inclined, in which case
it does not differ much in principle from a wheel with flat
buckets, which has also been used for raising water.
Fig. 179.
312
MECHANICS.
Blowers.
330. A blower is a machine for creating and keeping up
a constant flow of air, either for promoting combustion, or
for the purposes of ventilation. One of the simplest, and not
the least important, of this class of machines, is the black-
smith's bellows, a section of which is shown in Fig. 180.
The Blacksmith's Bellows.
331. The blacksmith's bellows is a machine that re-
sembles the accumulator described in Art. 231, air being used
instead of water. It con-
sists essentially of three
plates, usually of wood,
A, B, and 0. The mid-
dle one. A, is fixed in
position, whilst the up-
per and lower ones, 6' and
B, are free to turn about
Kg. 183.
hinge-joints at B and Z> ; the upper and lower plates are at-
tached to the middle one by flexible sheets of leather, nailed
to their respective edges ; the joints at B and D are also cov-
ered by pieces of leather attached to the plates in the same
manner. By this arrangement the whole machine is sepa-
rated into two air-tight compartments, U and L, the capacity
of each being capable of a certain amount of contraction and
expansion.
The middle plate. A, has a valve, F, opening upward and
closing by its own weight ; a similar valve, G, exists in the
lower plate. The upper compartrdent terminates in a nozzle
through which the air contained in the compartment U, is
forced by the action of the weight, W. The supply of air, in
the upper compartment is kept up by means of the movable
plate B, which is raised by means of a link, MJf, worked by
HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC MACHINES.
313
a lever not shown in the diagram, and which falls by its own
weight. When the plate B, is raised all the air in the com-
partment L, is forced into the compartment JJ, where it is
kept from returning by the closing of the valve F; whilst
the plate B, is descending the valve G, is kept open by the
pressure of the external air and the compartment L, is filled.
When the plate B, is raised again a new supply of air is
forced into the compartment TJ, and so on indefinitely.
The strength of the current through the nozzle may be in-
creased by increasing the weight, W.
-&
-
-a-.P
The Yentilating Blower.
232. One form of ventilating blower is shown in
Fig. 181. A solid piston, P, is moved up and down in the
barrel. A, by a piston-rod, R, set
in motion by a steam-engine. The
barrel. A, is provided with four
valves, B, G, D, E, the first two
of which open inward and the
others open outward, as indicated
in the diagram. Air passing
through either D ov E is driven
through the pipe, F, to the place
where it is to be utilized.
To explain the action of this machine, let us suppose the
piston to be, say, at the upper limit of its play. Then, when
the piston is depressed, the valve, G, will be closed by the
tension of the compressed air, the valve, D, will be opened,
the air which is forced into the pipe will close the valve, E,
and all the air below the piston will be forced into the pipe,
F; meantime the valve, B, is opened by the pressure of the
external air and the space behind the piston is filled with air
from without. When the piston is raised the valve, B, is
closed by the tension of the compriessed air, the valve, E, is
Pig. 181.
314
MBCHANTICS.
opened, the air which is forced into the pipe closes the valve,
D, and all the air above the piston is forced into the pipe, F;
meantime the valve, G, is opened by the pressure of the ex-
ternal air and the space behind the piston is filled with air
from without. In this manner a continuous stream of air is
kept flowing through the pipe, F, which may be utilized in
any desirable manner.
8
f
I
1
r
E
^
^^
si
i±DK
Fig. 182.
The Air Pump.
333. The air ptunp is a machine for rarefying air.
It consists of a barrel. A, in which a piston, B, is worked
up and down by a lever, G, attached to a piston-rod, D. The
barrel communicates with a ves- „
sel, E, called a receiver, by a
narrow pipe. The receiver is
usually of glass, ground to fit
air-tight on a smooth bed-plate,
KK. The joint between the
receiver and plate may be ren-
dered more perfectly air-tight by interposing a layer of tallow.
A stop-cock, H, permits communication to be made at pleas-
ure between the barrel and receiver, or between the barrel
and external air. When the stop-cock is turned in a particu-
lar direction, the barrel and receiver communicate ; but on
turning it through 90 degrees, the communication with the
receiver is cut off, and a communication is opened between
the barrel and external air. Instead of the stop-cock, valves
are often used, that are opened and closed by the elastic force
of the air, or by the force that works the pump. The com-
municating pipe should be exceedingly small, and the piston,
B, when at its lowest point, should fit accurately into the
bottom of the barrel.
To explain the action of the air pump, suppose the piston
to be at its lowest position. The stop-cock, H, is turned so
HTDKAULIC AND PNEUMATIC MACHINES. 315
as to open a coniniunication between the barrel and receiver,
and the piston is raised to its highest point by a force applied
to the lever, C. The air, which before occupied the receiver
and pipe, expands so as to fill the barrel, receiver, and pipe.
The stop-cock is then turned to cut ofE communication
between the barrel and receiver, and open the barrel to the
external air, and the piston again depressed to its lowest
position. The air in the barrel is expelled by the depression
of the piston. The air in the receiver is now more rare than
at the beginning, and by a continued repetition of the process,
any degree of rarefaction may be attained.
To measure the rarefaction of the air in the receiver, a
siphon-gauge may be used, or a glass tube, 30 inches long,
may be made to communicate at its upper extremity with the
receiver, whilst its lower extremity dips into a cistern of
mercury. As the air is rarefied in the receiver, the pressure
on the mercury in the tube becomes less than on that in the
cistern, and the mercury rises in the tube. The tension of
the air in the receiver is indicated by the differenpe between
the height of the barometric column and that of the mercury
in the tube.
To investigate a formula for the tension of the air in the
receiver, after any number of double strokes, let us denote the
capacity of the receiver by r, that of the connecting-pipe by
p, and that of the space between the bottom of the barrel
and the highest position of the piston by 5. Denote the
original tension of the air by t ; its tension after the first
upward stroke of the piston by t' ; after the second, third,
. . .»'*, upward strokes, by t", t'", . . .t"'.
The air which occupied the receiver and pipe, after the
, first upward stroke, fills the receiver, pipe,\and barrel: ac-
cording to Mariottb's law, its tension in the two cases varies
inversely as the volumes occupied ; hence.
316 MECHANICS.
In like manner, we shall have, after the second upward stroke,
t':f::p + r + b:p + r, .: t" =t'j^^^.
Substituting for i' its value, deduced from the preceding
equation, we have.
In like manner, we find,
and, in general, after the n'* stroke,
^ -H^ + j + j-r
If the pipe is exceedingly smaU, its capacity may be neg-
lected in comparison with that of the receiver, and we then
have.
Let it be required, for example, to determine the tension of
the air after 5 upward strokes, when the capacity of the barrel
is one third that of the receiver.
T
In this case, ■= = #, and w = 5, whence,
+ r
Hence, the tehsion is less than a fourth part of that of the
external air.
HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC MACHINES. 317
Instead of the receiver, the pipe may be connected by a
screw-joint with any closed vessel, as a hollow globe, or glass
flask. In this case, by reversing the direction of. the stop-
cock, in the up and down motion of the piston, the instru-
ment may be used as a condenser. When so used, the tension
after n downward strokes of the piston, is given by the
formula.
Taking the same case as that before considered, with the
exception that the instrument is used as a condenser instead
of a rarefier, we have, after 5 downward strokes.
That is, the tension is eight thirds that of the external air.
Artificial Fouutaias.
334. An artificial fountain is an instrument by which a
liquid is forced upward in the form of a jet, by the tension of
condensed air. The simplest form of artificial fountain is
called Heko's ball.
Hero's Ball.
235. This consists of a globe, A, into the top of which is
inserted a tube, B, reaching nearly to the bottom
of the globe. This tube is provided with a stop-
cock, *(7, by which it may be closed, or opened at
pleasure. A second tube, D, enters the globe
near the top, which is also provided with a stop-
cock, E.
To use the instrument, close the stop-cock, C, ^^,
and fill the lower portion of the globe with water
through D ; then connect Z» with a condenser, and piimp air
318
MECHANICS.
into the upper part of the globe, and confine it there by clos-
ing the stop-cock, E. If, now, the stop-cock, G, be opened,
the pressure of the confined air on the surface of the water in
the globe forces a jet through the tube, B. This jet rises to
a greater or less height, according to the greater or less
quantity of air that was forced into the globe. The water
will continue to flow through the tube as long as the tension
of the confined air is greater than that of the external atmos-
phere, or else till the level of the water in the globe reaches
the lower end of the tube.
Instead of using the condenser, air may be introduced by
blowing with the mouth through the tube, D, and confined
by turning the stop-cock, E.
The piinciple of Hero's ball is the same as that of the
air-chamber in the forcing-pump and fire-engine, already ex-
plained.
Hero's Fountain.
236. Hero's fountain is constructed on the same prin-
ciple as Heko's ball, except that the compression
of the air is efEeoted by the weight of a column of
water, instead of by a condenser.
-4 is a cistern, similar to Hero's ball, with a
tube, B, extending nearly to the bottom of the
cistern. C is a second cistern placed at some dis-
tance below A. This cistern is connected with a
basin, D, by a bent tube, E, and also with the
upper part of the cistern, ^, by a tube, F. When
the fountain is to be used, A is nearly filled with
water, G being empty, A quantity of water is
then poured into the basin, D, which, acting by
its weight, sinks into C, compressing the air in the upper
portion of it into a smaller space, thus increasing its tension.
This increase of tension acting on the surface of the water in
A, forces a jet through B, which rises to a greater or less
Pig. 184
HYDKAULIC AND PNEUMATIC MACHINES. 319
height according to the greater or less tension. The flow will
continue till the level of the water in A reaches the bottom of
the tube, B. The measure of the compressing force on a
unit of surface of the water in G, is the weight of a column
of water, whose base is that unit, and whose altitude is the
difEerence of level between the water in B and in G.
If Heko's ball be partially filled with -water and placed
under the receiver of an air-pump, the water will be observed
to rise in the tube, forming a fountain, as the air in the re-
ceiver is exhausted. The principle is the same as before ;
the flow is due to an excess of pressure on the vater within
the globe over that without. In both cases, the flow is re-
sisted by the tension of the air without, and is urged on by
the tension within.
Wine-Taster and Dropping-Bottle.
237. The wine-taster is used to bring up a small portion
of wine or other liquid from a cask. It consists of a tube,
open at the top, and terminating below in a narrow
tube, also open. When it is to be used, it is inserted
to any depth in the liquid, which rises in the tube to
the level of the liquid without. The finger is then
placed so as to close the upper end of the tube, and
the instrument raised out of the cask. The fluid '
escapes from the lower end, until the pressure of the
rarefied air in the tube, plus the weight of a column ^s- iss.
of liquid, whose cross-section is that of the tube, and
whose altitude is that of the fluid retained, is equal to the
pressure of the external air. If the tube be placed over a
tumbler, and the finger removed from the upper orifice, the
fluid brought up flows into the tumbler.
If the lower orifice is very small, a few drops may be allowed
to escape, by taking off the finger and immediately replacing
it. The instrument then constitutes the dropping-bottle.-
m
wBh.
m